Fujitsu Laptop S7100 User Manual

S7110.book Page 1 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
®
Fujitsu LifeBook  
S7100 Notebook  
User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 3 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
C o p y r i g h t  
Copyright and Trademark Information  
Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation has made every effort  
to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document;  
however, as ongoing development efforts are continually  
improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guar-  
antee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We  
disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes.  
Quicken® is a registered trademark of Intuit, Inc., or  
one of its subsidiaries, in the United States and other countries.  
Norton and Internet Security are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Symantec Corporation in the United States and  
other countries.  
PowerDVD is a trademark of CyberLink Corp.  
Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LifeBook are registered trade-  
marks of Fujitsu Limited.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that  
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation  
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech-  
nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is  
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless  
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
The following are registered trademarks of IBM  
Corporation: IBM, IBM PC AT, IBM PS/2.  
The ExpressCard word mark and logo are owned by the  
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association  
(PCMCIA) and any use of such marks by Fujitsu Computer  
Systems Corporation is under license.  
All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their  
respective owners.  
MS, MS-DOS, and Windows are either registered trademarks  
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
WARNING  
PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory  
Card International Association.  
Handling the cord on this product will expose you  
to lead, a chemical known to the State of  
California to cause birth defects or other  
reproductive harm.  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corpora-  
tion or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.  
The Bluetooth trademark is owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
USA.  
Wash hands after handling.  
Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are either registered trade-  
marks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
© Copyright 2006 Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation.  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied,  
reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent of  
Fujitsu. No part of this publication may be stored or trans-  
mitted in any electronic form without the written consent of  
Fujitsu.  
Dolby Headphone is manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
B6FH-8881-01EN-00  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
according to FCC Part 15  
Responsible Party Name:  
Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation  
Address:  
1250 E. Arques Avenue, M/S 122  
Sunnyvale, CA 94085  
Telephone:  
(408) 746-6000  
Declares that product:  
LifeBook S7110 notebook  
Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device must not be allowed to cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 4 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
UL Notice  
For Authorized Repair Technicians Only  
This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL  
Listed Class 2 Adapters with an output rating of 19 V  
DC, with a current of 4.22 A.  
For continued protection against risk of  
fire, replace only with the same type and  
rating fuse.  
AC Adapter output polarity:  
Danger of explosion if Lithium (clock)  
battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace  
only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by the manufacturer. Dis-  
pose of used batteries according to the  
manufacturer’s instruction.  
+
When using your notebook equipment, basic safety  
precautions should always be followed to reduce the  
risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons,  
including the following:  
System Disposal  
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT  
Do not use this product near water for example,  
CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST  
BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF  
ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE, OR  
FEDERAL LAWS.  
Hg  
near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry  
tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.  
Avoid using the modem during an electrical storm.  
There may be a remote risk of electric shock from  
lightning.  
Do not use the modem to report a gas leak in the  
vicinity of the leak.  
Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in  
this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire.  
They may explode. Check with local codes for  
possible special disposal instructions.  
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or  
larger UL Listed or CSA Certified Telecommunication  
Line Cord  
For TV Tuner Models: To protect yourself from over-  
voltages on the Cable Distribution System, make sure  
that the outer shield of the coaxial cable is connected  
to earth (grounded) at the building premises as close  
to the point of cable entrance as practical.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 5 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s  
Fujitsu LifeBook® S7100 Notebook  
Table of Contents  
Keyboard  
1
Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Numeric Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Windows Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
PREFACE  
Preface  
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Fujitsu Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Touchpad Pointing Device  
Clicking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Double-Clicking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Touchpad Control Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Optional Quick Point Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR  
LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK  
Volume Control  
Controlling the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Overview  
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Flexible Bay Devices  
Locating Controls and Connectors  
Top and Front Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Left-Side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Right-Side Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Back Panel Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
Bottom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Removing and Installing Modular Devices . . . . .19  
LifeBook Security/Application Panel  
Setting up Your LifeBook Security Panel . . . . . . .21  
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Operating Your Security/ Application Panel . . . .22  
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Uninstalling the Security Panel Application . . . . .22  
Launching Applications with the Panel . . . . . . . .23  
Status Indicator Panel  
Power Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
AC Adapter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Battery Level Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Battery Charging Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off Indicator . . . . .13  
Optical Drive Access Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Hard Drive or Media Drive Access Indicator . . . .13  
PC Card Access Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
NumLk Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
CapsLock Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
ScrLk Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Security Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
3
GETTING STARTED WITH YOUR  
LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK  
Power Sources  
Connecting the Power Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Display Panel  
Opening the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Adjusting Display Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Closing the Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 6 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Starting Your LifeBook Notebook  
Memory Upgrade Module  
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Boot Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Hard Disk Drive Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
BIOS Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Booting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Windows Product Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Registering Your LifeBook Notebook . . . . . . . . . 31  
Installing Click Me! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Installing Memory Upgrade Modules. . . . . . . . . 45  
Removing a Memory Upgrade Module . . . . . . . 46  
Checking the Memory Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Memory Stick/SD/xD Card Slot  
Inserting Memory Stick/SD/xD Cards . . . . . . . . 47  
Removing A Memory Stick/SD/XD Card . . . . . . 48  
Port Replicator  
Back Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Front Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Attaching the Port Replicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Detaching the Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Power Management  
Power/Suspend/Resume Button . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Standby Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Display Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Hard Disk Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Windows Power Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Restarting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Device Ports  
Modem (RJ-11) Telephone Jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
PS/2 Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Docking Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Universal Serial Bus Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Infrared Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
S-Video Out Port (TV Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
IEEE 1394 Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Headphone/Line Out Jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Microphone/Stereo Line-In Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
External Video Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
4
USER-INSTALLABLE FEATURES  
Optical Drive  
Media Player Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Loading Media on Your Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Removing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Emergency Optical Drive Tray Release. . . . . . . . 38  
Using the Media Player Software. . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Using Dolby™ Headphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Using Media Player on Battery Power . . . . . . . . 39  
5
TROUBLESHOOTING YOUR  
LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK  
Lithium ion Battery  
Recharging the Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Troubleshooting  
Replacing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Identifying the Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Specific Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Troubleshooting Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Power On Self Test Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Emergency Optical Drive Tray Release. . . . . . . . 67  
Modem Result Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
External USB Floppy Disk Drive  
Loading a Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Ejecting a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Preparing a Disk for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
PC Cards/ExpressCards™  
Inserting PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Removing PC Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Inserting ExpressCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Removing ExpressCards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Smart Card Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Restoring Pre-installed Software  
Restoring the Factory Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Automatically Downloading Driver Updates . . . 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 7 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s  
APPENDIX A: USING THE  
6
WIRELESS LAN DEVICE  
Wireless LAN Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
Deactivating the WLAN Device . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Activating the WLAN Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
CARING FOR YOUR  
LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK  
Care and Maintenance  
Configuration of the WLAN Device  
Flow of Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Configuration Using Intel PROSet Utility . . . . . .98  
Connection to the network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Floppy Disks and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Media Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
PC Cards/ExpressCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Troubleshooting the WLAN  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
7
Wireless LAN Glossary  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS  
IP address information  
About IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Specifications  
Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Microprocessor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Chipset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Mass Storage Device Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Device Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Popular Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Pre-Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Learning About Your Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
WLAN Specifications  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Using the Bluetooth Device  
What is Bluetooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Where to Find Information About Bluetooth . .107  
APPENDIX B: USING THE  
FINGERPRINT SENSOR DEVICE  
Fingerprint Sensor Device  
Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . . . .111  
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Installing OmniPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
User Enrollment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Using OmniPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Configuring OmniPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
OmniPass Control Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
8
GLOSSARY/REGULATORY  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
INDEX  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 8 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 1 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
1
Preface  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 2 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 1 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
P r e f a c e  
Preface  
ABOUT THIS GUIDE  
FUJITSU CONTACT INFORMATION  
Service and Support  
You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the  
The LifeBook S7100 notebook from Fujitsu is a powerful  
computer. It is powered by a fast Intel® Core™ Duo  
processor, has a built-in TFT color display, a number of  
possible configurations, and brings the computing  
power of desktop personal computers (PCs) to a  
portable environment.  
following ways:  
Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487)  
E-mail: 8fujitsu@us.fujitsu.com  
Website:  
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support  
This manual explains how to operate your LifeBook  
notebook’s hardware and built-in system software. Your  
computer comes with Microsoft Windows® XP Home or  
Windows XP Professional pre-installed.  
Before you place the call, you should have the following  
information ready so that the customer support  
representative can provide you with the fastest possible  
solution:  
The LifeBook S7100 notebook is a completely self-  
contained unit with an active-matrix (TFT) color LCD  
display. It has a powerful interface that enables it to  
support a variety of optional features.  
Product name  
Product configuration number  
Product serial number  
Purchase date  
Conditions under which the problem occurred  
Any error messages that have occurred  
Type of device connected, if any  
Conventions Used in the Guide  
Keyboard keys appear in brackets.  
Example: [Fn], [F1], [ESC], [ENTER] and [CTRL].  
Pages with additional information about a specific topic  
are cross-referenced within the text.  
For example: (See page xx.)  
Fujitsu Online  
You can go directly to the online Fujitsu Product catalog  
for your LifeBook notebook by going to:  
www.shopfujitsu.com.  
On screen buttons or menu items appear in bold  
Example: Click OK to restart your LifeBook notebook.  
You can also reach Fujitsu Service and Support online by  
clicking on the Service and Support Website URL link,  
located in the Fujitsu Web links -> Service and Support  
Software folder of the Windows Start menu.  
DOS commands you enter appear in Courier type.  
Example: Shutdown the computer?  
The information icon highlights  
information that will enhance your  
understanding of the subject material.  
You must have an active internet  
connection to use the online URL links.  
The caution icon highlights information  
that is important to the safe operation of  
your computer, or to the integrity of your  
files. Please read all caution information.  
LIMITED WARRANTY  
Your LifeBook notebook is backed by a Fujitsu Interna-  
tional Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came  
with your notebook for the Limited Warranty period  
and terms and conditions.  
The warning icon highlights information  
that can be hazardous to either you, your  
LifeBook notebook, or your files. Please  
read all warning information carefully.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 2 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 3 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
2
Getting to Know  
Your LifeBook Notebook  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 4 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 5 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
Figure 2-1. Fujitsu LifeBook S7100 notebook  
Depending on your system configuration, the following  
optional items may be included with your system:  
Overview  
This section describes the components of your Fujitsu  
LifeBook S7100 notebook. We strongly recommend that  
you read it before using your notebook – even if you are  
already familiar with notebook computers.  
Modular bay battery  
External USB floppy disk drive  
Depending on your configuration, you may receive the  
following application CDs:  
UNPACKING  
CD-RW Application CD  
Bluetooth Driver and Utility CD  
Fingerprint Sensor Software CD  
When you receive your LifeBook notebook, unpack it  
carefully, and compare the parts you have received with  
the items listed below.  
Once you have checked and confirmed that your Life-  
Book system is complete, read through the following  
pages to learn about all of your notebook’s components.  
For a pre-configured model you should have:  
LifeBook S7100 notebook (Figure 2-1)  
AC adapter with AC power cord (Figure 2-2)  
Lithium ion Battery, pre-installed  
Weight Saver  
Phone/Modem (RJ-11) telephone cable  
Driver and Application Restore (DAR) Disc  
Restore DVD  
Mini S-Video Cable Adapter (Figure 2-3)  
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Driver and  
Application CD  
Getting Started Guide  
User’s Guide (this document)  
International Limited Warranty Brochure  
Figure 2-2 AC Adapter  
Microsoft®-associated product materials  
Depending on your system configuration, one of the  
following devices will be pre-installed in the Flexible  
Bay:  
Weight Saver  
Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer  
Modular DVD/CD-RW combo drive  
Modular DVD-ROM drive  
Figure 2-3 Mini S-Video Cable Adapter  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 6 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Quick Point Cursor Control Button (optional)  
Display Panel  
Status  
Indicator Panel  
LifeBook Security/  
Application Panel  
Power/  
Suspend/  
Resume Button  
Stereo Speakers  
Air Vents  
Keyboard  
Wireless LAN/  
Bluetooth On/Off Switch  
Touchpad  
Pointing Device  
Display Panel Latch  
Air Vents  
Memory Stick/SD/xD Card Slot  
Figure 2-4. LifeBook notebook with display open  
Windows. (See Power/Suspend/Resume Button on page 32  
for more information)  
Locating the Controls  
and Connectors  
Stereo Speakers  
The built-in dual speakers allow for stereo sound.  
TOP AND FRONT COMPONENTS  
The following is a brief description of your LifeBook  
notebook’s top and front components.  
Keyboard  
A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows keys. (See  
Keyboard on page 14 for more information)  
Display Panel  
The display panel is a color LCD panel with back  
Touchpad Pointing Device/Scroll Button  
The Touchpad pointing device is a mouse-like cursor  
control with five buttons (two left, two right, and scroll  
button). (See Touchpad Pointing Device on page 16 for  
more information) Certain configurations of this system  
have an optional fingerprint sensor located in place of  
the scroll button. (See Fingerprint Sensor Device on  
page 111 for more information)  
lighting for the display of text and graphics.  
Status Indicator Panel  
The Status Indicator Panel displays symbols that corre-  
spond with a specific component of your LifeBook note-  
book. (See Status Indicator Panel on page 12 for more  
information)  
Display Panel Latch  
The display panel latch locks and releases the display  
panel.  
LifeBook Security/Application Panel  
The LifeBook Security/Application Panel provides  
hardware security and one-touch application launch  
capability. (See LifeBook Security/Application Panel on  
page 21 for more information)  
Memory Stick/SD/xD-Picture Card Slot  
The Memory Stick/Secure Digital/xD-Picture card slot  
allows you to insert a flash memory card for data  
storage. This architecture allows you to transfer data  
from a variety of different digital devices. (See Memory  
Stick/Secure Digital/xD Card Slot on page 47 for more  
information)  
Power/Suspend/Resume Button  
The Power/Suspend/Resume button allows you to  
suspend notebook activity without powering off, resume  
your LifeBook notebook from standby mode, and power  
on your notebook when it has been shut down from  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 7 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
Air Vents  
The air vents are used to cool the system to prevent over-  
heating.  
To protect your notebook from damage  
and to optimize system performance, be  
sure to keep all air all vents unobstructed,  
clean, and clear of debris. This may  
require periodic cleaning, depending upon  
the environment in which the system is  
used.  
Do not operate the notebook in areas  
where the air vents can be obstructed,  
such as in tight enclosures or on soft  
surfaces like a bed or cushion.  
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off Switch  
The wireless LAN/Bluetooth on/off switch is used to  
power on and off the optional WLAN/Bluetooth device.  
Switching the devices off when not in use will help to  
extend battery life.  
Quick Point Cursor Control (optional)  
The optional Quick Point control offers an additional  
method for moving the cursor. (See Optional Quick  
Point Feature on page 17 for more information)  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 8 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
DC Power Jack  
S-Video Out Jack  
Line In/Microphone Jack  
Line Out/Headphone Jack  
ExpressCard Slot  
ExpressCard Eject Button  
PC Card Eject Button  
PC Card Slot  
IEEE 1394 Jack  
Air Vents  
External Video Port (behind cover)  
Figure 2-5. LifeBook notebook left-side panel  
PC Card Eject Button  
LEFT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS  
The following is a brief description of your LifeBook  
notebook’s left-side components.  
The PC Card eject buttons are used to eject a PC Card  
from the PC Card slot. (See PC Cards/ExpressCards™ on  
page 43 for more information)  
DC Power Jack  
PC Card Slot  
The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter  
to power your LifeBook notebook and charge the  
internal Lithium ion battery.  
The PC Card Slot allows you to insert a Type I or Type II  
PC Card. (See PC Cards/ExpressCards™ on page 43 for  
more information)  
S-Video Out Jack  
IEEE 1394 (4-pin) Jack  
The S-Video output is used to transmit a higher resolu-  
tion video signal to a compatible TV or VCR.(See S-  
Video Out Port (TV Out) on page 54 for more informa-  
tion)  
The 4-pin 1394 jack is used to connect between  
your LifeBook and an IEEE 1394 peripheral such as a  
digital video camera. (See IEEE 1394 Port on page 54 for  
more information)  
Microphone/Line-In Jack  
Air Vents  
The microphone/line-in jack allows you to connect an  
external audio source or an external mono microphone.  
(See Microphone/Stereo Line-In Jack on page 54 for more  
information)  
The air vents are used to cool the system to prevent over-  
heating.  
To protect your notebook from damage  
and to optimize system performance, be  
sure to keep all air all vents unobstructed,  
clean, and clear of debris. This may  
require periodic cleaning, depending upon  
the environment in which it is used.  
Headphone/Line-Out Jack  
The headphone/line-out jack allows you to connect  
headphones or powered external speakers. (See Head-  
phone/Line Out Jack on page 54 for more information)  
ExpressCard Slot  
Do not operate the notebook in areas  
where the air vents can be obstructed,  
such as in tight enclosures or on soft  
surfaces like a bed or cushion.  
The ExpressCard Slot allows you to insert an Express-  
Card. (See PC Cards/ExpressCards™ on page 43 for more  
information)  
ExpressCard Eject Button  
External Video Port  
The ExpressCard eject button is used to eject an Express-  
Card from the ExpressCard slot. (See PC Cards/Express-  
Cards™ on page 43 for more information)  
The external video port allows you to connect an  
external monitor or LCD projector. (See External Video  
Port on page 54 for more information)  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 9 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
Anti-Theft Lock Slot  
Modem (RJ-11) Jack  
USB 2.0 Port  
Flexible Bay  
Eject Lever  
Flexible Bay  
Figure 2-6. LifeBook notebook right-side panel  
Flexible Bay  
RIGHT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS  
The following is a brief description of your LifeBook  
notebook’s right-side components.  
The Flexible Bay can accommodate one of the following  
devices. (See Flexible Bay Devices on page 19 for more  
information)  
Modem (RJ-11) Telephone Jack  
Modular DVD-ROM drive  
The Modem (RJ-11) telephone jack is for attaching  
a telephone line to the internal multinational 56K  
modem. (See Modem (RJ-11) Telephone Jack on page 52  
for more information)  
Modular DVD/CD-RW combo drive  
Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer  
Modular Lithium ion battery  
Weight Saver  
Flexible Bay Eject Lever  
The Flexible Bay eject lever releases the Flexible Bay  
device.  
The internal modem is not intended for  
use with Digital PBX systems. Do not  
connect the internal modem to a Digital  
PBX as it may cause serious damage to the  
internal modem or your entire notebook.  
Consult your PBX manufacturer’s  
documentation for details. Some hotels  
have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find  
out BEFORE you connect your modem.  
USB 2.0 Port  
The USB 2.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial  
Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480Mbps  
and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices,  
which transfer data at up to 12Mbps. (See Universal  
Serial Bus Ports on page 53 for more information)  
The internal multinational modem is  
designed to the ITU-T V.90 standard. Its  
maximum speed of 53000bps is the  
highest allowed by FCC, and its actual  
connection rate depends on the line  
conditions. The maximum speed is 33600  
bps at upload.  
Anti-theft Lock Slot  
The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach an optional  
physical lock down device.  
For additional information about the  
multinational modem, refer to the Fujitsu  
website at: us.fujitsu.com/computers  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 10 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
LAN (RJ-45) Jack  
Anti-Theft Lock Slot  
USB 2.0 Ports (Qty. 2)  
Infrared Port  
Figure 2-7. LifeBook notebook back panel  
BACK PANEL COMPONENTS  
Following is a brief description of your LifeBook note-  
book’s back panel components.  
LAN (RJ-45) Jack  
The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for an internal  
Gigabit (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T/Tx)  
Ethernet LAN connection. (See Internal LAN (RJ-45)  
Jack on page 52 for more information)  
Anti-theft Lock Slot  
The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach an optional  
physical lock down device.  
USB 2.0 Ports  
The USB 2.0 ports allow you to connect Universal Serial  
Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480Mbps  
and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices,  
which transfer data at up to 12Mbps. (See Universal  
Serial Bus Ports on page 53 for more information)  
Infrared Port  
The fast IrDA compatible port allows you to communi-  
cate with another IrDA compatible infrared device  
without a cable. (See Infrared Port on page 53 for more  
information)  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 11 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
Battery Release Latch  
Lithium ion  
Battery Bay  
Latch Release  
Port Replicator  
Connector  
Certificate of  
Authenticity  
(approximate  
location)  
Air Vents  
Memory Upgrade  
Compartment  
Main Unit and  
Configuration  
Label  
Air Vents  
Figure 2-8. LifeBook notebook bottom panel  
fies the exact version of various components of your  
notebook.  
BOTTOM COMPONENTS  
The following is a brief description of your LifeBook  
notebook’s bottom panel components.  
Air Vents  
The air vents are used to cool the system to prevent over-  
heating.  
Port Replicator Connector  
This connector allows you to connect the optional Port  
Replicator to your notebook.  
To protect your notebook from damage  
and to optimize system performance, be  
sure to keep all air all vents unobstructed,  
clean, and clear of debris. This may  
require periodic cleaning, depending upon  
the environment in which the system is  
used.  
Memory Upgrade Compartment  
Your LifeBook notebook comes with high speed Double  
Data Rate 2 (DDR2) Synchronous Dynamic RAM  
(SDRAM). The memory upgrade compartment allows  
you to expand the system memory capacity of your Life-  
Book notebook, hence improving overall performance.  
(See Memory Upgrade Module on page 45 for more infor-  
mation)  
Do not operate the notebook in areas  
where the air vents can be obstructed,  
such as in tight enclosures or on soft  
surfaces like a bed or cushion.  
Lithium ion Battery Bay  
The battery bay contains the internal Lithium ion  
battery. It can be opened for the removal of the battery  
when stored over a long period of time or for swapping  
a discharged battery with a charged Lithium ion battery.  
(See Lithium ion Battery on page 40 for more information)  
Main Unit and Configuration Label  
The configuration label shows the model number and  
other information about your LifeBook notebook. In  
addition, the configuration portion of the label has the  
serial number and manufacturer information that you  
will need to give your support representative. It identi-  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 12 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
1
2
Power  
Battery Indicators  
Optical  
Drive Access  
PC Card Access  
CapsLk  
AC Adapter  
Wireless LAN/  
Bluetooth On/Off  
Hard Drive Access  
NumLk  
ScrLk  
Figure 2-9. Status Indicator Panel  
Status Indicator Panel  
BATTERY LEVEL INDICATORS  
The two Battery Level indicators shows whether or not  
the primary Lithium ion battery and/or the optional  
secondary Lithium ion battery is installed. Battery 1  
refers to the primary battery; battery 2 refers to the Flex-  
ible Bay optional secondary battery. In addition, this  
symbol states how much charge is available within each  
installed battery. The symbol will only be displayed for a  
battery that is currently installed in your notebook.  
(Figure 2-10)  
The Status Indicator displays symbols that correspond  
with a specific component of your Fujitsu LifeBook  
notebook. These symbols tell you how each of those  
components are operating. (Figure 2-9)  
POWER INDICATOR  
The Power indicator symbol states whether your system  
is operational. It has several different states, each of  
which tells you the mode your notebook is in.  
76%–100% Charging  
76%–100%  
Steady On: This means that there is power to your  
notebook and that it is ready for use.  
Flashing: This means that your notebook is in Standby  
mode.  
51%–75%  
Steady Off: This means that your system is either in  
Save-to-Disk mode, or that your notebook has been  
turned off.  
26%–50%  
11%–25%  
If you are charging your battery, the Power indicator will  
remain on even if your notebook is shut off. The Power  
indicator will also remain on if you have either adapter  
connected and are shut down from Windows.  
Low Warning <11%  
Critical Low or  
Dead Battery  
AC ADAPTER INDICATOR  
Shorted Battery  
The AC Adapter indicator states whether your notebook  
is operating from the AC adapter, Auto/Airline adapter  
or battery. This icon has two different states that can tell  
you what power source your notebook is using.  
Figure 2-10 Battery Level Indicator  
A shorted battery is damaged and must be  
replaced. (Figure 2-10)  
On: This means that either of the adapters are  
currently in use.  
Off: Power is only coming from the battery and you do  
not have an adapter connected.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 13 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
BATTERY CHARGING INDICATORS  
Located to the left of each Battery Level indicator is a  
small arrow symbol. This symbol indicates whether a  
specific battery is charging. This indicator will flash if  
the battery is too hot or cold to charge.  
PC CARD ACCESS INDICATOR  
The PC Card Access indicator displays whether or not  
your notebook is accessing a PC Card. The indicator will  
flash if your software tries to access a PC Card even if  
there is no card inserted. (See PC Cards/ExpressCards™  
on page 43 for more information)  
Batteries subjected to shocks, vibration or  
extreme temperatures can be permanently  
damaged.  
NUMLK INDICATOR  
The NumLk indicator states that the integral keyboard is  
set in ten-key numeric keypad mode.  
WIRELESS LAN/BLUETOOTH  
DEVICE ON/OFF INDICATOR  
The Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off indicator shows  
CAPSLOCK INDICATOR  
The CapsLock indicator states that your keyboard is set  
to type in all capital letters.  
whether the WLAN/Bluetooth switch is turned on.  
SCRLK INDICATOR  
The ScrLk indicator states that your scroll lock is active.  
OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESS INDICATOR  
The Optical Drive Access indicator tells you that the  
media drive is being accessed. If the Auto Insert Notifi-  
cation function is active, the indicator will flash periodi-  
cally when your system is checking the optical drive. If  
the Auto Insert Notification function is not active, the  
indicator will only flash when you access the media  
drive. The default setting is the Auto Insert Notification  
function active.  
SECURITY INDICATOR  
The Security Indicator flashes (if a password was set)  
when the system resumes from Off or Standby modes.  
You must enter the password that was set in the Security  
Panel before your system will resume operation.  
The DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM Auto Insert  
Notification function will periodically check  
for a disc installed in the drive, causing the  
Media Player Drive Access indicator to  
flash. The DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM Auto  
Insert Notification function allows your  
system to automatically start a disc as soon  
as it is inserted in the drive and the tray is  
closed. It will begin playing an audio DVD/  
CD or will start an application if the DVD/  
CD has an auto run file  
HARD DRIVE OR REMOVABLE  
MEDIA DRIVE ACCESS INDICATOR  
The Hard Drive Access indicator states whether your  
internal hard drive is being accessed.  
If your LifeBook notebook has two hard  
drives, the Hard Drive Access indicator  
does not show which hard drive is being  
accessed.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 14 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Function Keys  
End  
Home  
Optional Quick Point  
Cursor Control  
Fn Key  
Start Key  
Numeric Keypad  
(surrounded by heavy line)  
Application Key  
Cursor Keys  
Figure 2-11 Keyboard  
NUMERIC KEYPAD  
Keyboard  
Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual functions as  
both standard character keys and numeric keypad keys.  
NumLk can be activated by pressing the [NumLk] keys.  
Turning off the NumLk feature is done the same way.  
Once this feature is activated you can enter numerals 0  
through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ),  
multiplication ( * ), or division ( / ), and enter decimal  
points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function  
keys. The keys in the numeric keypad are marked on the  
front edge of the key to indicate their secondary func-  
tions. (Figure 2-11)  
USING THE KEYBOARD  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has an integral 84-key  
keyboard. The keys perform all the standard functions of  
a 101-key keyboard, including the Windows keys and  
other special function keys. This section describes the  
following keys. (Figure 2-11)  
Numeric keypad: Your notebook allows certain keys to  
serve dual purposes, both as standard characters and  
as numeric and mathematical keys. The ability to tog-  
gle between the standard character and numerical keys  
is controlled through the [NumLk] key.  
WINDOWS KEYS  
Your LifeBook notebook has two Windows keys,  
consisting of a Start key and an Application key. The  
Start key displays the Start menu. This button functions  
the same as your onscreen Start menu button. The  
Application key functions the same as your right mouse  
button and displays shortcut menus for the selected  
item. (Please refer to your Windows documentation for  
additional information regarding the Windows keys.)  
(Figure 2-11)  
Cursor keys: Your keyboard contains four arrow  
keys for moving the cursor or insertion point to the  
right, left, up, or down within windows, applications  
and documents.  
Function keys: The keys labeled [F1] through [F12],  
are used in conjunction with the [Fn] key to produce  
special actions that vary depending on what program  
is running.  
Windows keys: These keys work with your Windows  
operating system and function the same as the  
onscreen Start menu button, or the right button  
on your pointing device.  
CURSOR KEYS  
The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the keyboard  
which allow you to move the cursor up, down, left and  
right in applications. In programs such as Windows  
Explorer, it moves the “focus” (selects the next item up,  
down, left, or right). (Figure 2-11)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 15 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
FUNCTION KEYS  
Your LifeBook notebook has 12 function keys, F1  
through F12. The functions assigned to these keys differ  
for each application. You should refer to your software  
documentation to find out how these keys are used.  
(Figure 2-11)  
The [Fn] key provides extended functions for the  
notebook and is always used in conjunction with  
another key.  
[Fn+F3]: Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle  
the Audio Mute on and off.  
[Fn+F4]: Pressing [F4] while holding [Fn] will toggle  
the Quick Point feature on and off. Note that the  
[Fn+F4] combination only works if Manual Setting is  
selected in the BIOS. (See “BIOS Setup Utility” on  
page 29)  
[Fn+F6]: Pressing [F6] repeatedly while holding [Fn]  
will lower the brightness of your display.*  
[Fn+F7]: Pressing [F7] repeatedly while holding [Fn]  
will increase the brightness of the display.*  
[Fn+F8]: Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn]  
will decrease the volume of your LifeBook note-  
book.**  
[Fn+F9]: Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn]  
will increase the volume of your LifeBook notebook.**  
[Fn+F10]: Pressing [F10] while holding [Fn] allows  
you to change your selection of where to send your  
display video. Each time you press the combination of  
keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in  
order, are: built-in display panel only, both built-in  
display panel and external monitor or external  
monitor only.  
* There are eight brightness levels.  
** There are 26 audio levels.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 16 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Optional Quick Point Control  
Cursor Control  
Left Buttons  
Scroll Button  
Right Buttons  
Figure 2-12. Touchpad pointing device  
Touchpad Pointing Device  
An external mouse can be connected to  
either the USB port on your LifeBook note-  
book or the USB or PS/2 ports on the  
optional port replicator, and used simulta-  
neously with the Touchpad. However, if  
you boot the system with an external  
mouse connected the Touchpad will be  
disabled or enabled depending on the  
specifications in your BIOS settings. (See  
BIOS Setup Utility on page 29 for more  
information)  
Certain S7100 LifeBook notebooks are  
equipped with an optional “Quick Point”  
button for moving the cursor. For more  
information about Quick Point, see  
“Optional Quick Point Feature” on  
page 17.  
The Touchpad pointing device comes built into your  
Fujitsu LifeBook notebook. It is used to control the  
movement of the pointer to select items on your display  
panel. The Touchpad is composed of a cursor control,  
two left and two right buttons, and a scrolling button.  
The purpose of the upper left and right buttons is to  
facilitate use of the optional cursor control button.  
CLICKING  
Clicking means pushing and releasing a button. To left-  
click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select,  
press the left button once, and then immediately release  
it. To right-click, move the mouse cursor to the item you  
wish to select, press the right button once, and then  
immediately release it. You also have the option to  
perform the clicking operation by tapping lightly on the  
Touchpad once. (Figure 2-13)  
Certain configurations of the LifeBook  
S7100 notebook have an optional finger-  
print sensor instead of a scrolling button.  
For information on using the optional fin-  
gerprint sensor, refer to “Fingerprint Sen-  
sor Device” on page 111.  
The cursor control works the same way a mouse does,  
and moves the cursor around the display. It only requires  
light pressure with the tip of your finger. The left and  
right buttons function the same as mouse buttons. The  
actual functionality of the buttons may vary depending  
on the application that is being used. The scrolling  
button allows you to navigate quickly through pages,  
without having to use the scroll bars. (Figure 2-12)  
Figure 2-13 Clicking  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 17 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
DOUBLE-CLICKING  
TOUCHPAD CONTROL ADJUSTMENT  
The Windows Control Panel allows you to customize your  
Touchpad with selections made from within the Mouse  
Properties dialog box.  
Double-clicking means pushing and releasing the left  
button twice in rapid succession. This procedure does  
not function with the right button. To double-click,  
move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press  
the left button twice, and then immediately release it.  
You also have the option to perform the double-click  
operation by tapping lightly on the Touchpad twice.  
(Figure 2-14)  
SCROLLING  
Using the Scrolling button allows you to navigate  
through a document quickly without using the window’s  
scroll bars. This is particularly useful when you are navi-  
gating through on-line pages. To use the Scrolling  
button, press the crescent shape at the top or bottom of  
the button to scroll up or down a page. When you have  
reached the desired section of the page, release the  
button. (Figure 2-16)  
If your system configuration has an  
optional fingerprint sensor instead of a  
scrolling button, there is no button to click.  
Instead, scrolling is performed by the sen-  
sor’s motion detector. For information on  
using the optional fingerprint sensor, refer  
to “Fingerprint Sensor Device” on  
page 111.  
Figure 2-14 Double-clicking  
If the interval between clicks is too  
long, the double-click will not be  
executed.  
Parameters for the Touchpad can be  
adjusted from the Mouse Properties  
dialog box located in the Windows  
Control Panel.  
DRAGGING  
Dragging means pressing and holding the left button,  
while moving the cursor. To drag, move the cursor to  
the item you wish to move. Press and hold the left  
button while moving the item to its new location  
and then release it. Dragging can also be done using the  
Touchpad. First, tap the Touchpad twice over the item  
you wish to move making sure to leave your finger on  
the pad after the final tap. Next, move the object to its  
new location by moving your finger across the  
Touchpad, and then release your finger. (Figure 2-15)  
Figure 2-16 Scrolling  
OPTIONAL QUICK POINT FEATURE  
The optional Quick Point device consists of a cursor  
control button at the lower center of the keyboard. It is  
roughly the same size and shape as a pencil eraser. The  
cursor control works the same way a mouse ball does,  
and moves the cursor around the display. It only requires  
light pressure to move; the more pressure you use, the  
faster the cursor will move.  
When used with the Quick Point button, the middle  
Touchpad button allows you to scroll up and down a  
screen. As noted earlier, the purpose of the upper left  
and right buttons is to facilitate use of the optional  
cursor control button.  
Figure 2-15 Dragging  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 18 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Volume Control  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has multiple volume  
controls which interact with each other.  
Any software that contains audio files will  
also contain a volume control of its own. If  
you install an external audio device that  
has an independent volume control, the  
hardware volume control and the software  
volume control will interact with each  
other. It should be noted that if you set  
your software volume to Off, you will  
override the external volume control  
setting.  
CONTROLLING THE VOLUME  
The volume can be controlled in several different  
ways:  
Volume can be set from within the Volume Control  
on the Taskbar.  
Volume can be controlled with the F8 and F9 function  
keys. Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will  
decrease the volume of your notebook. Pressing [F9]  
repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume  
of your notebook.  
Volume can be controlled by many volume controls  
that are set within individual applications.  
Certain external audio devices you might connect to  
your system may have hardware volume controls.  
Each source discussed above puts an upper limit on the  
volume level that must then be followed by the other  
sources.  
Volume muting can be toggled on and off by pressing  
[F3] while holding the [Fn} button.  
We recommend that you experiment with the various  
volume controls to discover the optimal sound level.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 19 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
Flexible Bay Eject Lever  
Flexible bay  
Figure 2-17 Flexible Bay  
Cold-swapping  
To cold-swap modular devices in your Flexible Bay  
follow these easy steps: (Figure 2-18)  
Flexible Bay Devices  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook contains a Flexible Bay.  
The Flexible Bay can house an optical drive, a Lithium  
ion battery, or a weight saver. (Figure 2-17)  
1. Close any open files.  
2. Shut down your LifeBook notebook.  
Your Flexible Bay will have one of the following devices  
installed.  
3. Pull out the Flexible Bay eject lever. This will push  
your device out slightly, allowing you to remove the  
device.  
Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: This  
allows you to access movies, software, and audio  
DVD/CDs and record to DVD, CD, and DVD-RAM  
discs.  
4. Slide your device out until it is clear of the bay.  
This will require light force.  
Modular DVD/CD-RW combo drive: This allows you  
to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs as  
well as to write to CDs.  
Modular DVD-ROM drive: This allows you to access  
software, data, or audio DVDs and CDs.  
Modular Lithium ion battery: This is a rechargeable  
battery that can be used to power your LifeBook note-  
book when an adapter is not connected.  
Weight Saver: This is used to fill the bay when no  
device is needed.  
REMOVING AND INSTALLING  
MODULAR DEVICES  
There are two ways to remove and install modular  
devices in the Flexible Bay:  
Cold-swapping: swapping devices while your LifeBook  
notebook is powered off.  
Hot-swapping: swapping devices while your system is  
active using the Unplug/Eject icon from your taskbar.  
Figure 2-18 Removing/Installing a device in the Flexible Bay  
You should never leave your Flexible Bay  
empty when the notebook is in operation.  
If left empty, dust or foreign matter may  
accumulate inside the notebook.  
Be careful when aligning and seating  
devices in the bay. If the fit is incorrect,  
you may damage the bay or the device. If  
the device does not move easily in the bay,  
remove it, and check for dirt or foreign  
objects. It will require a firm push to latch  
the device in place.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 20 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
5. Slide the device you are installing into your  
notebook until it clicks into place.  
6. It is now safe to turn your notebook back on.  
7. You can now access and use the device.  
Your LifeBook notebook will automatically detect the  
new device and activate it within your system. The drive  
letters associated with the device will be created and  
listed under My Computer and Windows Explorer.  
Hot-swapping  
Under Windows XP Home and Windows XP Profes-  
sional, hot-swapping is provided through the Unplug or  
Eject Hardware utility.  
The icon for the utility appears on the taskbar. Click on  
the icon and follow the on-screen instructions.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 21 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
Button 1*  
Button 2*  
Button 3*  
Button 4*  
Enter button  
1
2
3
4
Enter  
* Security/Application Launcher  
buttons (for entering passwords  
and launching applications)  
Figure 2-19. LifeBook Security/Application Panel  
Pushing [4] by itself  
LifeBook Security/  
Pushing [2] and [3] at the same time  
Pushing [1], [2], and [4] at the same time  
Pushing [1], [2], [3], and [4] at the same time  
Application Panel  
A unique feature of your LifeBook notebook is the  
Security/Application Panel that allows you to secure your  
notebook from unauthorized use. The Security/Applica-  
tion Panel also allows you to launch applications with the  
touch of a button when your system is on.  
The following are valid passwords. The numbers  
within braces ({ }) are button strokes using more  
than one button.  
{[2]+[3]}, [1], [enter]  
[4], [enter]  
{[1]+[3]}, {[2]+[3]+[4]}, [1], [4], [2], [enter]  
If the security system is activated, upon starting your  
notebook or resuming from standby mode the security  
system requires you to enter a password code using the  
buttons on the Security/Application Panel. After entering  
a correct password, your notebook resumes operation.  
Setting Passwords  
When shipped from the factory, no passwords are set.  
You have a choice of having no password or setting a  
supervisor and user password. You must set the super-  
SETTING UP YOUR  
visor password before the user password.  
LIFEBOOK SECURITY PANEL  
When you receive your LifeBook notebook, the security  
panel application is pre-installed without any passwords.  
The following sections provide detailed information on  
your security panel, and how to set, change or remove  
passwords.  
The supervisor password is used to  
bypass the user password in case the  
user password is forgotten. A supervisor  
password alone will not lock the system.  
You must set both the supervisor and  
user passwords for the security panel to  
work.  
Numbered Buttons  
Use these buttons to enter your password.  
Setting Supervisor Password  
Enter Button  
After entering the button strokes, push this button to  
enter the password into the LifeBook notebook.  
You must have set a supervisor password before setting  
any user passwords. The supervisor password can bypass  
the user password.  
1. Go to the Start menu.  
2. Click on Run.  
PASSWORDS  
The user and supervisor password may be set on this  
notebook. A supervisor password is typically the same  
for all LifeBook notebooks in a working group, office, or  
company to allow for system management. Individual  
LifeBook notebooks in a group environment should not  
use a common password. A password consists of one to  
five button strokes plus the enter button. A valid stroke  
consists of pushing one or up to four buttons simulta-  
neously. The following are valid button strokes:  
3. Type in:  
C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\  
Security Panel Application\  
Supervisor\FJSECS.EXE,  
then press [Enter]  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the  
Supervisor password.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 22 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Setting User Password  
Remember the user password you  
specified on the Security Panel Application.  
If you forget the password you will not be  
able to use your computer.  
1
Go to the Start menu.  
2. Click on Programs.  
3. Click on Security Panel Application and  
Set User Password.  
Note that the supervisor password can  
override the user password, but if you  
forget the supervisor password, Fujitsu  
Computer Systems charges a service fee  
for unlocking a password restricted  
LifeBook notebook.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the user  
password.  
You may change or remove the supervisor  
or user password by repeating the steps  
defined above.  
PRECAUTIONS  
Opening and Closing the Cover  
OPERATING YOUR LIFEBOOK SECURITY/  
APPLICATION PANEL  
The security lock feature is in effect both when the system  
resumes from Off or standby state. You always need to  
push the Suspend /Resume button to input the user pass-  
word. Your system will not begin the boot sequence  
without entering your supervisor/user password.  
Closing the cover automatically places the notebook into  
standby mode. Opening the cover does not automati-  
cally place the notebook into normal operation. Instead,  
you must enter the proper security password after  
pushing the Power/Suspend/Resume button.  
Low Battery Operations  
If your LifeBook notebook has low battery, pushing the  
Power/Suspend/Resume button only turns on the Secu-  
rity Indicator. Your notebook does not unlock, the Secu-  
rity Indicator turns off after one minute. To resume  
normal operation, first attach a power supply to the  
notebook. Then you may unlock the notebook.  
From Off State  
1. Turn on your system.  
2. When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the pass-  
word and press Enter button.  
For example, if the password is 22222,  
Press Button Number 2 five times and press Enter  
button.  
UNINSTALLING THE SECURITY  
PANEL APPLICATION  
You have two options when uninstalling the security  
The LifeBook notebook will boot to normal opera-  
tion.  
panel application:  
Uninstall the security panel application software.  
This will disable all security feature.  
Uninstall the security panel application with password  
still active. This will not allow any changes to the  
password.  
From Standby State  
1. Press your Power/Suspend/Resume button.  
2. When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the pass-  
word and press Enter button.  
The notebook should resume normal operation.  
Uninstalling the Security Panel Software  
Incorrect Password Entry  
Remove passwords when User wants no password  
protection whatsoever and doesn’t want to give anybody  
the utility to set a password on their computer. In this  
case, if passwords (supervisor, user, or both) are set, the  
passwords must first be cleared BEFORE removing the  
application. To clear passwords, follow same procedure  
in SETTING PASSWORD CODES except this time,  
select REMOVE, enter current password then click Next.  
When asked to confirm select Yes.  
If an invalid supervisor or user password is entered three  
times in succession, the system will “beep” for about one  
minute. If a valid password is entered within a minute  
(while system beeps), the beeping will stop and the note-  
book will resume normal operation. If no password (or  
an invalid one) is entered while the system beeps, the  
system will return to its previous locked state (standby  
or off) and the Security Indicator will go off. To reacti-  
vate the notebook after a password failure, you must  
press the Power/Suspend/Resume button, then enter a  
correct password.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 23 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g t o K n o w Yo u r L i f e B o o k  
Removing Security Panel Application with  
Passwords Still Active  
Using this feature will not allow any changes to the  
If you forget both passwords, please contact Fujitsu  
Computer Systems Corporation Service and Support at  
1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487). Fujitsu Computer  
Systems Corporation charges a service fee for unlocking  
a password restricted LifeBook notebook. When calling  
please have a valid credit card and provide proof of  
ownership. You will then be given instructions on where  
to ship your notebook.  
password.  
Removing the applications does not  
remove the password. It simply removes  
the ability to change/add/remove  
passwords. To change your password you  
must reinstall the application.  
LAUNCHING APPLICATIONS WITH  
THE SECURITY/APPLICATION PANEL  
User:  
The security panel also enables you to launch applications  
with the touch of a button when your system is on.  
Pressing any of the buttons will launch a user-defined  
application. Your notebook is pre-installed with software  
utilities that let you operate and configure your LifeBook  
Security /Application Panel. These utilities are found in  
the Start menu, under Settings -> Control Panel ->  
Application Panel. (For Windows XP users, go to Start ->  
Control Panel -> Other Control Panel Settings ->  
Application Panel. They include two Application Panel  
Setup tabs, E-mail Setup, and Internet Setup.  
1. Go to Start Menu, Click on Control Panel.  
2. Open Add/Remove Programs Properties in the  
Control Panel.  
3. Select the Security Panel Application in the list, and  
click Add/Remove.  
4. When the Confirm File Deletion box appears,  
click Yes.  
Supervisor:  
1. Go to Start Menu, Click on Control Panel.  
2. Open Add/Remove Programs Properties in the  
Control Panel.  
Configuring your LifeBook Application Panel  
When you start Windows, the LifeBook Application  
Panel is automatically activated. The LifeBook Applica-  
tion Panel can be stopped and restarted by going to Start  
-> All Programs -> LifeBook Application Panel, and  
selecting the desired action.  
3. Select the Security Panel Application for  
Supervisor in the list, and click Add/Remove.  
4. When the Confirm File Deletion box appears,  
click Yes.  
Reinstalling the Security/Application Panel  
To reinstall supervisor or user security application, you  
will need your Drivers and Applications CD. The  
Utilities/Security Application Panel folder contains two  
separate folders: Supervisor and User. The setup files for  
supervisor and user security applications are contained  
in those folders.  
As an application launcher, the LifeBook Application  
Panel is very flexible, giving you a variety of options. To  
set up the Panel to best suit your needs, we have  
provided the Application Panel Setup utility that quickly  
and easily helps you make the most of this valuable  
feature.  
To configure your LifeBook Application Panel with  
Application Panel Setup (after it has been initially set  
up):  
1. Go to the Utilities/Security Application Pane/  
Supervisor folder on the CD and double-click the  
setups.exe file. The Installing Security Panel Appli-  
cation window will appear. Follow the instructions  
on the screen.  
1. Click on Start -> Control Panel.  
2. Click on the Application Panel icon.  
The Application Panel Setup utility will appear. There  
are tabs that correspond to the application buttons on  
the LifeBook Application Panel. When you receive your  
notebook, these buttons are pre-configured to launch  
specific programs, as referenced in Chapter 7 of this  
document.  
2. Go to the Utilities/Security Application Panel/User  
folder on the CD and double-click the setup.exe file.  
The Installing Security Panel Application window  
will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen.  
Supervisor and user passwords can be set via Windows  
software using the FJSECS.exe and FJSECU.exe files,  
respectively. FJSECU.exe for the user password cannot  
run without first setting a supervisor password. You  
need to run FJSECS.exe first to set the supervisor pass-  
word. Follow instructions under Setting Passwords on  
page 21.  
The tabs in Application Panel Setup may  
not be in the same order as the buttons on  
your LifeBook notebook, please select the  
tab you wish to change carefully.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 24 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
To change an application associated with the Applica-  
tion buttons, click on the tab for the button you would  
like to reconfigure – for example, Application A. Click  
on Browse from Start Menu, scroll down the list of  
applications, click on the application you wish to launch  
with this button, and then click OK. The button will  
now launch the new application.  
Deactivating and Activating the LifeBook  
Application Panel  
To deactivate the LifeBook Application Panel, follow  
these easy steps:  
1. Click on Start.  
2. Click on Programs.  
3. Click on LifeBook Application Panel.  
4. Click on Stop Application Panel.  
The Internet tab is different. It comes set to launch your  
Windows default Internet browser (Internet Explorer),  
unless you have changed this in Windows. In order to  
reconfigure it to launch another program follow these  
easy steps:  
To reactivate, follow the same procedure, except for  
step 4. Click on Restart Application Panel instead.  
1. Click on Other from the Internet browser box.  
2. Click on Browse from Start Menu.  
Every time you start Windows the  
LifeBook Application Panel is activated,  
even if you deactivated it before you shut  
down.  
3. Scroll down the list of applications, and then click  
on the application you wish to launch with this  
button.  
4. Click OK.  
The button will now launch the new application. If you  
want to return to launching your Windows default  
Internet browser with this button, you need only click  
on “Default Internet Browser” from the Internet  
browser box. Be aware that you will erase the settings for  
the “other application. If you wish to go back to  
launching the “other application” from this button, you  
will need to reconfigure it as described above.  
If your system has dedicated one of the  
application launcher buttons to be an  
Internet launcher, the button can still be  
configured to launch any application you  
wish, not just an Internet browser.  
When you have finished with Application Panel Setup  
click OK, and the new settings will take effect. You can  
reconfigure your LifeBook Application Panel as often as  
you like.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 25 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
3
Getting Started  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 26 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 27 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g S t a r t e d  
DC Output Cable  
DC Power  
Jack  
AC Adapter  
AC Cable  
Figure 3-1 Connecting the AC Adapter  
2. Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette  
lighter of an automobile with the ignition key in  
the On or Accessories position.  
Power Sources  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has three possible  
power sources: a primary Lithium ion battery, an AC  
adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter.  
OR  
3. Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power  
jack on an airplane seat.  
CONNECTING THE POWER ADAPTERS  
The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter  
provides power for operating your notebook and  
charging the batteries.  
Switching from AC Adapter Power or the  
Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power  
1. Be sure that you have at least one charged  
battery installed.  
Connecting the AC Adapter  
1. Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack  
2. Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter.  
of your LifeBook notebook.  
The Lithium ion battery is not charged  
upon purchase. Initially, you will need to  
connect either the AC adapter or the  
Auto/Airline adapter to use your  
notebook.  
2. Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet.  
(Figure 3-1)  
Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter  
1. Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack  
on your notebook.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 28 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Display Panel  
Display Panel Latch  
Figure 3-2 Opening the Display Panel  
Display Panel  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook contains a display panel  
that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments  
and maintains top resolution through the use of active-  
matrix technology.  
When using AC power your brightness  
setting is set to its highest level by default.  
When using battery power your brightness  
setting is set to approximately mid-level by  
default.  
OPENING THE DISPLAY PANEL  
1. Press the Display Panel latch. This releases the  
The higher the brightness level, the more  
power the notebook will consume and the  
faster your batteries will discharge. For  
maximum battery life, make sure that the  
brightness is set as low as possible.  
locking mechanism and raises the display slightly.  
2. Lift the display backwards, being careful not to  
touch the screen, until it is at a comfortable viewing  
angle. (Figure 3-2)  
CLOSING THE DISPLAY PANEL  
ADJUSTING DISPLAY PANEL BRIGHTNESS  
Once you have turned on your LifeBook notebook, you  
may want to adjust the brightness level of the screen to a  
more comfortable viewing level. There are two ways to  
adjust the brightness, by using the keyboard or the  
power management utility.  
1. Holding the edge of your display panel, pull it  
forward until it is flush with the body of your Life-  
Book notebook.  
2. Push down until you hear a click. This will engage  
the locking mechanism and prevent your display  
panel from opening unexpectedly.  
Using the Keyboard  
Adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the  
setting only temporarily.  
[Fn+F6]: Pressing repeatedly will lower the brightness  
of your display.  
[Fn+F7]: Pressing repeatedly will increase the  
brightness of the display.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 29 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g S t a r t e d  
BOOT SEQUENCE  
Starting Your  
The procedure for starting up your notebook is called  
the Bootup sequence and involves your notebook’s  
BIOS. When your LifeBook notebook is first turned on,  
the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find  
instructions to start up your notebook. This information  
is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or  
restart your notebook, it goes through a boot sequence  
which displays a Fujitsu logo until your operating system  
is loaded. During booting, your notebook is performing  
a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test  
(POST). If the sequence is completed without a failure  
and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the  
system displays the operating system’s opening screen.  
LifeBook Notebook  
POWER ON  
Power/Suspend/Resume Button  
The Power/Suspend/Resume button is used to turn on  
your LifeBook notebook from its off state. Once you  
have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal  
Lithium ion battery, you can power on your LifeBook  
notebook. (See figure 2-4 on page 6 for location)  
When you turn on your LifeBook  
notebook be sure you have a power  
source. This means that at least one  
battery is installed and charged, or that the  
AC or Auto/Airline adapter is connected  
and has power.  
The boot sequence is executed when:  
You turn on the power to your LifeBook notebook.  
You restart your notebook from the Windows  
Shut Down dialog box.  
The software initiates a system restart. Example:  
To turn on your LifeBook notebook from its off state,  
press the Power/Suspend/Resume button, located above  
the keyboard, the right-most button in the array. When  
you are done working you can either leave your LifeBook  
notebook in Standby mode, (See Standby Mode on  
page 32 for more information), or you can turn it off (See  
Power Off on page 33 for more information).  
When you install a new application.  
HARD DISK DRIVE PASSWORDS  
To provide additional security for your data, you can  
assign passwords to your hard disk drive(s). This feature  
is managed in the system BIOS Setup Utility. See BIOS  
Setup Utility below for information about accessing the  
utility.  
Do not carry your LifeBook notebook  
around with the power on or subject it to  
shocks or vibration, as you risk damaging  
your notebook.  
Remember your passwords. If you set and  
forget your User and Master hard disk  
passwords, Fujitsu Computer Systems will  
not be able to reset it. You may lose data  
and have to replace your system board or  
hard disk drive.  
When you power on your LifeBook, it will perform a  
Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and  
configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found,  
your LifeBook notebook will emit an audio warning and/  
or an error message will be displayed. (See Power On Self  
Test Messages on page 66 for more information)  
Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able  
to continue by starting the operating system or by  
entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings.  
BIOS SETUP UTILITY  
The BIOS Setup Utility is a program that sets up the  
operating environment for your LifeBook notebook.  
Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating  
conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change  
the BIOS’ environment to operate your notebook.  
After satisfactory completion of the Power On Self Test  
(POST), your notebook will load your operating system.  
The BIOS Setup Utility configures:  
Device control feature parameters, such as changing  
Never turn off your LifeBook notebook  
during the Power On Self Test (POST) or it  
will cause an error message to be displayed  
when you turn your LifeBook notebook on  
the next time. (See Power On Self Test  
Messages on page 66 for more  
I/O addresses and boot devices.  
System Data Security feature parameters, such as  
passwords.  
Entering the BIOS Setup Utility  
To enter the BIOS Setup Utility do the following:  
information)  
1. Turn on or restart your LifeBook notebook.  
2. Press the [F2] key once the Fujitsu logo appears on  
the screen. This will open the main menu of the  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 30 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings  
displayed.  
Skip button, and you will go directly to the condition of  
use page.  
3. Press the [RIGHT ARROW] or [LEFT ARROW] key  
to scroll through the other setup menus to review or  
alter the current settings.  
Make sure you have connected a phone  
line to your modem before you use E-  
Registration.  
BIOS Guide  
A guide to your notebook’s BIOS is available online.  
Please visit our service and support Website at: http//  
www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support. Once there,  
select Support, then select Notebooks under User’s  
Guides. Select LifeBook BIOS Guides from the pull-  
down menu for your LifeBook series. If you are unsure  
Once you have set up your notebook to dial out,  
Windows will make a free telephone call which will test  
these settings. If the call is unsuccessful, you will be  
returned to the phone settings page where you may try  
to fix them. If you are unable to fix the settings please  
contact Fujitsu Service and Support. (See Fujitsu Contact  
Information on page 1 for more information) If you would  
simply like to move on, and register at a later time, you  
may click the Skip button, and you will go directly to the  
Condition of Use page.  
of the notebook BIOS number, refer to the packing slip.  
If your data security settings require it, you  
may be asked for a password before the  
BIOS main menu will appear.  
Registration  
If your connection is successful, you will go to the  
Registration Confirmation page. On this page simply  
enter the requested information, and then check the  
box at the bottom to register your copy of Windows with  
Microsoft. Once you have finished, click the Next button  
to continue.  
BOOTING THE SYSTEM  
We strongly recommend that you do not attach any  
external devices and do not put a DVD/CD in any drive  
until you have gone through the initial power on  
sequence.  
When you turn on your LifeBook notebook for the first  
time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you  
do nothing the system will load the operating system,  
and then the Windows Welcome will begin.  
If you do not register at this time you can  
do it later simply by double-clicking on the  
LifeBook Registration icon on your  
desktop and following the instructions.  
Designed to accommodate the needs of users in many  
different countries, Windows needs to be configured the  
first time you use it. Windows has three parts:  
You will then go through the Fujitsu registration process.  
Follow the instructions on the screens, and enter all of  
the necessary information. Be as specific as possible so  
that if you need help the service and support team will  
be able to serve you better.  
Getting Started: You have the opportunity to enter  
custom information for your configuration file and  
setup your modem so that your LifeBook notebook  
will be prepared to dial out.  
Final Settings  
Registration: Easy online registration for Windows  
with Microsoft, and for your LifeBook notebook with  
Fujitsu.  
The first part of your final settings is the Windows End  
User License Agreement. Read the agreement carefully.  
When you finish reading you must accept or reject the  
terms of the agreement and then click on the Next button.  
Windows License Agreement and Final Settings:  
You have the opportunity to review the Windows.  
If you reject the terms of the license  
agreement you will be asked to review the  
license agreement for information on  
returning to Windows or to shut down  
your LifeBook notebook.  
Getting Started  
Read the instructions on the screens carefully and fill in  
the information as directed. You will be asked for such  
items as the language you wish to use, the country in  
which you live, your first and last name, and about how  
you dial out from where you will be using your note-  
book. For the modem settings, enter your current  
location information where you will be using your  
LifeBook notebook. If you are not connected to a phone  
line and plan to register at a later time, you may click the  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 31 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g S t a r t e d  
WINDOWS PRODUCT ACTIVATION  
Windows XP has already been pre-installed and pre-  
activated when you receive the system.  
In the event you need to re-install Windows XP (e.g.,  
after making significant configuration changes), it may  
be necessary to reactivate the operating system. To do so,  
use the following information.  
After re-installing Windows XP, you have thirty days to  
activate it. Product activation ensures that you are the  
authorized owner of the Windows XP operating sys-  
tem.  
Until you activate the product, you will be prompted  
whenever you turn on the system that activation is  
required. Follow the on-screen directions to activate  
your operating system. The product only needs to be  
activated once, unless significant hardware changes are  
made to your system.  
Note that Product Activation and Registration are not  
the same thing. Registration is optional, whereas Prod-  
uct Activation is a required procedure.  
REGISTERING YOUR LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK  
How do I register?  
To register, visit our Website at:  
us.fujitsu.com/computers  
INSTALLING CLICK ME!  
Before installing ClickMe!, be sure the  
wireless LAN switch is set to the On  
position.  
The first time you boot up your system, you will see an  
icon called Click Me! in the Start folder. When you click  
the icon, your system will automatically build the icon  
tray in the bottom right of the screen. These icons  
provide links to utilities that you will frequently access.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 32 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery  
Warning condition.  
Power Management  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has many options and  
features for conserving battery power. Some of these  
features are automatic and need no user intervention,  
such as those for the internal modem. However, others  
depend on the parameters you set to best suit your oper-  
ating conditions, such as those for the display bright-  
ness. Internal power management for your notebook  
may be controlled from settings made in your operating  
system, pre-bundled power management application, or  
from settings made in BIOS setup utility.  
Your notebook’s system memory typically stores the file  
on which you are working, open application informa-  
tion, and any other data required to support operations  
in progress. When you resume operation from Standby  
mode, your notebook will return to the point where it left  
off. You must use the Power/Suspend/Resume button to  
resume operation, and there must be an adequate power  
source available, or your notebook will not resume.  
If you are running your LifeBook note-  
book on battery power, be aware that  
the battery continues to discharge while  
your notebook is in Standby mode,  
though not as fast as when fully opera-  
tional.  
Besides the options available for conserving battery  
power, there are also some things that you can do to  
prevent your battery from running down as quickly.  
For example, you can create an appropriate power saving  
profile, put your notebook into Standby mode when it  
is not performing an operation, and you can limit the  
use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery  
powered computers, there is a trade-off between  
performance and power savings.  
Disabling the Power/Suspend/Resume  
button prevents it from being used to  
put your LifeBook notebook in Standby  
or Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) mode.  
The resume function of the button can-  
not be disabled.  
POWER/SUSPEND/RESUME BUTTON  
When your LifeBook notebook is active, the Power/  
Suspend/Resume button can be used to manually put  
your notebook into Standby mode. Push the Power/  
Suspend/Resume button when your notebook is active,  
but not actively accessing anything, and immediately  
release the button. You will hear two short beeps and  
your system will enter Standby mode. (See figure 2-4 on  
page 6 for location)  
The Standby or Hibernation (Save-to-  
Disk) mode should not be used with cer-  
tain PC Cards. Check your PC Card doc-  
umentation for more information. When  
PC Cards or external devices are in use,  
Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) mode cannot  
return to the exact state prior to suspen-  
sion, because all of the peripheral  
devices will be re-initialized when the  
system restarts.  
If your LifeBook is suspended, pushing the Power/  
Suspend/Resume button returns your notebook to active  
operation. You can tell whether the system is Suspended  
by looking at the Power indicator. (See figure 2-4 on  
page 6) If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your  
notebook is fully operational. If the indicator is visible  
and flashing, your notebook is in Standby mode. If the  
indicator is not visible, the power is off or your notebook  
is in Hibernation mode. (See Hibernation Feature)  
If your LifeBook notebook is actively  
accessing information when you enter  
the Standby or Hibernation (Save-to-  
Disk) mode, changes to open files are  
not lost. The files are left open and  
memory is kept active during Standby  
mode or the memory is transferred to  
the internal hard drive during Hiberna-  
tion mode.  
The main advantage of using the  
STANDBY MODE  
Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) function is that  
power is not required to maintain your  
data. This is particularly important if you  
will be leaving your LifeBook notebook in  
a suspended state for a prolonged period  
of time. The drawback of using  
Hibernation mode is that it lengthens the  
power down and power up sequences and  
resets peripheral devices.  
Standby mode in Windows saves the contents of your  
LifeBook notebook’s system memory during periods of  
inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This  
mode will turn off the CPU, the display, the hard drive,  
and all of the other internal components except those  
necessary to maintain system memory and allow for  
restarting. Your notebook can be put in Standby mode  
by:  
Pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume button when  
your system is turned on.  
Selecting Standby from the Windows Shut Down menu.  
Timing out from lack of activity.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 33 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G e t t i n g S t a r t e d  
HIBERNATION (SAVE-TO-DISK) FEATURE  
The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your  
LifeBook notebook’s system memory to the hard drive as  
a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. You can enable or  
disable this feature.  
RESTARTING THE SYSTEM  
If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure  
that you use the following procedure.  
1. Click the Start button, and then click Shut Down.  
2. Select the Restart option from within the Windows  
Enable or Disable the Hibernation Feature  
The default settings is not enabled. To enable or disable  
the Hibernation feature follow these easy steps:  
Shut Down dialog box.  
3. Click OK to restart your notebook. Your notebook  
will shut down and then reboot.  
1. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select  
Control Panel.  
Turning off your notebook without exiting  
Windows, or turning it on within 10  
seconds of being shut off may cause an  
error when you start the next time.  
2. From the Control Panel select Power Options.  
3. Select the Hibernate tab. Select the box to enable or  
disable this feature.  
4. Click the Apply button.  
POWER OFF  
Before turning off the power, check that the Hard Drive,  
optical drive, PC Card, and Floppy Disk indicators are  
all Off. (See figure 2-4 on page 6). If you power-off while  
accessing a disk or PC Card there is a risk of data loss. To  
ensure that the notebook shuts down without error, use  
the Windows shutdown procedure.  
Using the Hibernation Feature  
1. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select  
Control Panel.  
2. From the Control Panel select Power Options.  
3. Select the Advanced tab. Select Hibernate from the  
pull down menu for Power buttons.  
Be sure to close all files, exit all  
applications, and shut down your  
operating system prior to turning off the  
power. If files are open when you turn the  
power off, you will lose any changes that  
have not been saved, and may cause disk  
errors.  
DISPLAY TIMEOUT  
The Video Timeout is one of the power management  
parameters. This feature saves power by turning off the  
display if there is no keyboard or pointer activity for the  
user selected timeout period. Any keyboard or pointer  
activity will cause the display to restart automatically.  
This feature is independent of the Power/Suspend/  
Resume button and can be enabled and disabled in  
Windows and BIOS setup utility. (See BIOS Setup Utility  
on page 29 for more information)  
Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows  
allows your notebook to complete its operations and turn  
off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The  
proper sequence is:  
HARD DISK TIMEOUT  
1. Click the Start button, and then click Shut Down or  
Turn Off Computer.  
The Hard Disk Timeout is another one of the power  
management parameters. This feature saves power by  
turning off the hard drive if there is no hard drive  
activity for the user selected timeout period. Any  
attempt to access the hard drive will cause it to restart  
automatically. This feature is independent of the Power/  
Suspend/Resume button and can be enabled and  
disabled in Windows and BIOS setup utility. (See BIOS  
Setup Utility on page 29 for more information)  
2. Select the Shut Down option from within the  
Windows Shut Down dialog box.  
3. Click OK to shut down your notebook.  
If you are going to store your notebook for a month or  
more see Care and Maintenance Section.  
WINDOWS POWER MANAGEMENT  
Power Management  
The Power Management icon located in the Windows  
Control Panel allows you to configure some power  
management settings. For example, you can use Power  
Management to set the timeout values for turning off the  
display and hard disks whether you are running the  
notebook on battery power or one of the adapters. The  
settings may also be changed in the BIOS. (See BIOS  
Setup Utility on page 29 for more information)  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 34 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 35 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
4
User-Installable  
Features  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 36 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 37 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
Media Eject Button  
Media Holder Tray  
Figure 4-1. Optical Drive  
The Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer  
also supports burning and reading DVD-  
RAM. Windows XP supports burning and  
reading of DVD-RAM as a standard  
feature.  
Optical Drive  
There is a variety of media available to use with your  
system, depending upon the system configuration you  
have selected. Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer,  
DVD/CD-RW Combo drives, and DVD-ROM drives are  
known as “optical drives.  
DVD/CD-RW Combo model only: With the combo drive,  
you can play DVD movies, read audio CDs, and write  
data onto recordable CD-R or CD-RW discs.  
A CD-R or DVD-R disc can only be written to once;  
CD-RW or DVD-RW discs can be written to over and  
over. CD-R and CD-RW discs hold up to 700MB of data.  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs hold up to 4.7 GB of data. A  
dual-layer (single-sided) DVD+R disc can hold up to 8.5  
GB of data.  
DVD-ROM model only: With the DVD-ROM drive, you  
can read software, audio, or data CDs or DVDs  
Do not operate your optical drive  
unless your LifeBook notebook is  
sitting on a flat surface. Using a drive  
when the system is not level may  
damage the drive or prevent proper  
operation.  
Depending upon the configuration of your LifeBook  
notebook, you may have one of the following drives:  
Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: The Dual-  
Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer combines seven  
recordable formats in a single drive (DVD-R, DVD+R,  
DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, CD-R, and CD-  
RW), making it the most versatile drive to date.  
Prolonged use of the optical drive,  
such as watching a DVD movie, will  
substantially reduce your battery life if  
no other power source is attached.  
DVD/CD-RW combo: A DVD/CD-RW combo drive  
allows you to access movie, software, data, or audio  
DVD/CDs, and to write data onto recordable CD-R  
and CD-RW discs.  
LOADING MEDIA ON YOUR DRIVE  
To load a disc into your optical drive:  
DVD-ROM: A DVD-ROM drive allows you to access  
1. Push and release the eject button on the front of the  
optical drive to open the holder tray. The tray will  
come out of the LifeBook notebook a short distance.  
software, data, or audio DVDs or CDs.  
MEDIA PLAYER SOFTWARE  
2. Gently pull the tray out until a media disc can easily  
be placed in the tray.  
Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer model only: With  
the Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer and media  
player software you can play DVD movies and music  
CDs on your LifeBook notebook. The media player  
includes controls which allow you to take full advantage  
of the features of a DVD movie, as well as standard  
features such as fast forward, fast reverse, pause, etc.  
With this drive you can also burn onto recordable dual-  
layer DVD+R, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, or CD-R/RW  
discs.  
There may be a protective sheet in the tray  
from when it was shipped; please make  
sure it is removed before operating the  
drive.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 38 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
REMOVING MEDIA  
You should periodically check for  
1. Push and release the eject button on the front of  
the optical drive. This will stop the drive and the  
holder tray will come out of the LifeBook notebook  
a short distance.  
current updated drivers either by using  
the Fujitsu Driver Update utility (See  
“Automatically Downloading Driver  
Updates” on page 69) or by going to  
the Fujitsu website at us.fujitsu.com/  
computers.  
2. Gently pull the tray out until the disc can easily be  
removed from the tray.  
All LifeBook DVD players are set to play  
3. Carefully remove the media disc from the holder  
tray.  
DVD titles with region code number 1  
which is specified for the North Amer-  
ican market. The region number is a  
regional restriction code defined by the  
DVD Forum acting on Hollywood  
requirements. Different region codes  
are recorded on video DVD titles for  
publication in different areas of the  
world. If the regional code of the DVD  
player does not match the regional  
codes on the titles, then playback is  
impossible.  
4. Push the holder tray back in until you hear a click.  
EMERGENCY OPTICAL DRIVE TRAY RELEASE  
If for some reason the eject button fails, you can open  
the media tray with a paper clip or similar tool inserted  
into the eject hole in the right side of the front of the tray  
(Figure 4-3). Straighten one side of a paper clip and push  
it gently into the hole. The tray will pop out.  
You can change the region code on the  
DVD player using the Properties menu  
of the DVD software. Note, however,  
that you can only change the region  
code up to four times. After the fourth  
change, the last region code entered  
becomes permanent, and cannot be  
changed.  
3. Place the media into the tray, label side up, with the  
hole in the center of the disc. Snap the disc onto the  
raised circle in the center of the tray.  
Figure 4-3 Emergency Tray Release  
USING THE MEDIA PLAYER SOFTWARE  
4. Gently push the holder tray back in until you  
Depending upon its configuration, your  
system may not have the media player  
software pre-installed. If it is not installed,  
reference the documentation that  
hear a click. (Figure 4-2)  
If you have disabled the Auto Insert  
Notification Function, you will have to  
start the drive from your desktop, since  
your LifeBook notebook will not  
automatically recognize that media has  
been loaded.  
accompanies the media application.  
Starting a DVD Movie (DVD Models only)  
1. Insert the DVD movie into the optical drive of your  
notebook. If the CD auto run feature activates,  
skip Step 2.  
2. The first time you insert a movie into the DVD/CD-  
RW tray, you will be prompted to select what you  
want the system to do when discs are inserted (e.g.,  
start automatically or wait for a prompt). Until you  
make a selection, you will receive the same prompt  
whenever you insert a disc.  
(a)  
(b)  
3. Click OK to close the About DVD Player  
Performance dialog box and the movie will begin.  
Opening the Media Player Control Panel  
With most DVD-ROMs, you have the option of altering  
how the movie should play and what you wish to view.  
You can do this by using the media player control panel  
and the mouse.  
(c)  
(d)  
Figure 4-2. Loading/Ejecting Media  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 39 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
1. Right-click on the movie screen to open a dropdown  
menu for options.  
run-times are longer than your LifeBook notebook can  
support on a single charged battery. If you are watching a  
DVD movie on battery power you may need to swap in  
an additional, charged battery or attach AC power during  
the movie to view it in its entirety.  
2. Select View, then Player for all the controls available.  
This will open the control panel into the bottom of  
the screen.  
Using the Media Player Control Panel  
Prolonged use of the optical drive, such  
as watching a DVD movie, will greatly  
reduce your notebook’s battery life.  
The media player software allows you to watch the  
movie much like a VCR player. You can pause, rewind,  
fast-forward and stop the movie at any point.  
Many movie run-times are longer than  
your system can support on a single  
battery. If you are watching a DVD  
movie on battery power you may need  
to swap in an additional, charged  
battery or attach AC power during the  
movie to view it in its entirety.  
1. To Pause the movie, click the on-screenbutton.  
2. To Rewind the movie, click the button to rewind  
to a specific portion of the movie, or the button  
to return to the opening screen.  
3. To Fast-forward the movie, click the button to  
forward to a specific portion of the movie, or theꢄ  
button to jump to the ending credits.  
An additional fully-charged battery is  
highly recommended if you will be  
watching DVD movies on battery  
power. If you don’t have an additional  
battery, you may purchase one either  
online at www.shopfujitsu.com or by  
calling 1-800-FUJITSU.  
4. To Stop the movie, click the button.  
Exiting the Media Player  
1. Click the U located in the upper right corner of the  
title bar. This will open a media player dialog box.  
2. Click Yes to stop and exit the movie, or No to close  
the media player dialog box and return to the movie.  
To Watch a Movie on Battery Power:  
1. Have an additional full-charged battery or your AC  
adapter ready for use.  
USING DOLBYHEADPHONE  
2. Start watching your DVD movie.  
The Dolby Headphone utility lets you enjoy multi-  
channel sound sources with realistic surround sound  
using your conventional stereo headphones.  
3. When the low battery warning occurs, immediately  
stop the movie and exit the media player.  
If you do not stop the media player quickly  
and the LifeBook notebook attempts to  
auto-suspend (critical battery low state)  
the LifeBook notebook will shut down  
improperly. If this occurs, you will need to  
perform a hard reset and follow the  
instructions, if any, presented to you  
before the system will reboot.  
Dolby Headphone is a signal processing system that  
enables your stereo headphones to realistically portray  
the sound of a five-speaker playback system.  
Media discs which do not have the  
Dolby Surround 5:1 symbol will not  
support Dolby Headphone.  
After making changes to Dolby Head-  
phone and clicking OK, wait at least ten  
seconds before making another change  
in order to allow the system to stabilize.  
4. Power down your notebook and replace the  
discharged battery with a fully-charged battery. If  
you don’t have an additional battery, attach AC  
power as soon as you see the low battery warning.  
To use Dolby Headphone, perform the following steps:  
5. Resume your LifeBook notebook by pressing the  
Suspend button again. This is not required if you  
attached AC power without entering standby mode.  
1. Insert the disc in the media player tray. When you do  
so, PowerDVD will start automatically.  
2. Click on the Fujitsu logo on the PowerDVD control  
panel. If the disc supports Dolby Surround 5.1, a  
drop down menu appears.  
6. Restart your media player, locate and skip to the  
chapter of the movie you were last watching.  
7. Continue watching your DVD movie.  
3. Verify that Dolby headphones is checked on the  
menu. If you do not want it active, select Disable.  
Some shorter DVD movies may not require  
you to swap batteries or attach AC power  
to complete them. However, it is best to  
be prepared since actual battery life while  
operating the optical drive cannot be  
guaranteed.  
USING MEDIA PLAYER ON BATTERY POWER  
Since optical drives consume a lot of power, your overall  
battery life will be significantly shorter when operating  
the optical drive continuously (such as watching a DVD  
movie) than during standard operation. Many movies  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 40 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
RECHARGING THE BATTERIES  
Lithium ion Battery  
If you want to know the condition of the primary  
Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level indicator  
located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator  
changes as the battery level changes.  
Your LifeBook notebook has a Lithium ion battery that  
provides power for operating your notebook when no  
external power source is available. The battery is durable  
and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme  
temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or other hazards.  
The Lithium ion battery is recharged internally using  
the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the  
battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged  
is installed in your LifeBook notebook and connect the  
AC or Auto/Airline adapter.  
The Lithium ion battery operating time may become  
shorter if it is used under the following conditions:  
When used at temperatures that exceeds a low of 5°C  
or a high of 35°C. Extreme temperatures not only  
reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery  
deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indi-  
cator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery  
that is outside its operating temperature range.  
(See Battery Charging Indicators on page 13 for more  
information)  
Make sure that the Battery Charging  
indicator and the percentage charge is  
shown inside the Battery Level icon on the  
Status Indicator Panel.  
There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion battery  
therefore you do not need to discharge the battery  
completely before recharging. The charge times will be  
significantly longer if your notebook is in use while the  
battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery  
more quickly, put your notebook into Standby mode,  
or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery.  
(See Power Management on page 32 for more information  
When using a high current device such as a modem,  
Multi-Format DVD Writer, DVD-ROM drive, DVD/  
CD-RW combo drive, or the hard drive, using the AC  
adapter will conserve your battery life.  
Do not leave a faulty battery in your  
LifeBook notebook. It may damage your  
AC adapter, optional Auto/Airline adapter,  
another battery or your notebook itself. It  
may also prevent operation of your  
notebook by draining all available current  
into the bad battery.  
on Standby mode and shutdown procedure)  
Using heavy current devices such as  
Modem or frequent DVD/CD-RW/CD-  
ROM accesses may prevent charging  
completely.  
Actual battery life will vary based on  
Low Battery State  
screen brightness, applications, fea-  
tures, power management settings, bat-  
tery condition and other customer  
preferences. CD-ROM drive, Multi-For-  
mat DVD Writer, DVD/CD-RW drive  
combo, or hard drive usage may also  
have a significant impact on battery life.  
The battery charging capacity is reduced  
as the battery ages. If your battery is  
running low quickly, you should replace  
it with a new one.  
When the battery is running low, a low battery notifica-  
tion message will appear. If you do not respond to the  
low battery message, the batteries will continue to  
discharge until they are too low to operate. When this  
happens, your notebook will go into Standby mode.  
There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once  
the notebook reaches this point.  
Once the low battery notification mes-  
sage appears, you need to save all your  
active data and put your LifeBook note-  
book into Standby mode until you can  
provide a new power source. You should  
provide a charged battery, an AC power  
adapter, or Auto/Airline adapter as soon  
as possible.  
Under federal, state, or local law it may  
be illegal to dispose of batteries by put-  
ting them in the trash. Please take care  
of our environment and dispose of bat-  
teries properly. Check with your local  
government authority for details regard-  
ing recycling or disposing of old batter-  
ies. If you cannot find this information  
elsewhere, contact your support repre-  
sentative at 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-  
838-5487)  
When you are in Standby mode there  
must always be at least one power  
source active. If you remove all power  
sources while your LifeBook notebook is  
in Standby mode, any data that has not  
been saved to the hard drive will be lost.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 41 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indi-  
cator just like the normal Standby mode. Once your  
notebook goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will  
be unable to resume operation until you provide a  
source of power either from an adapter, or a charged  
battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to  
press the Power/Suspend/Resume button to resume  
operation.  
Latch Release  
In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be  
maintained for some time, but if a power source is not  
provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop  
flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data  
that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can  
continue to use your notebook while an adapter is  
charging the battery.  
Battery Bay  
Release Latch  
Battery Pack  
Figure 4-4. Removing a Battery  
Shorted Batteries  
The Status Indicator panel uses a symbol inside the  
battery outline of the Battery Level indicator to display  
the operating level available in that battery. (See figure 2-  
10 on page 12) If this display shows a Shorted Battery, it  
means the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it  
does not damage other parts of your LifeBook notebook.  
REPLACING THE BATTERY  
With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have  
a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not  
charged. There are two ways to swap batteries, cold-  
swapping and hot-swapping:  
Figure 4-5. Installing a Battery  
Cold-swapping Batteries  
To cold-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these  
easy steps: (Figure 4-4)  
Hot-swapping Batteries  
To hot-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these  
easy steps:  
1. Have a charged battery ready to install.  
Be sure to plug in an AC Adapter prior to  
removing the battery. There is no bridge  
battery present to support the system  
while the battery is being replaced. If you  
do not use an AC Adapter you will lose  
any unsaved files.  
2. Shut down your notebook and disconnect the AC  
adapter.  
3. Unlock the battery bay release latch by pushing the  
latch release away from the battery pack and sliding  
the battery bay release latch towards the latch release  
(Figure 4-4).  
4. Continue to press the latch release button away from  
the battery pack, and lift the battery out of the bay.  
1. Plug an AC Adapter into the system and connect it  
to a power outlet.  
5. Insert a new battery into the bay. (Figure 4-5)  
2. Follow steps 3 through 5 in “Cold Swapping  
Batteries.  
6. Slide the battery bay release latch back to its original  
position to lock the battery into place.  
8. Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on.  
If the Lithium ion battery connector is not  
fully seated, you may not be able to use  
your notebook or charge your battery.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 42 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Note: Illustration may vary,  
depending upon which external  
Eject Button  
Figure 4-6.Loading/Ejecting a 3.5” Floppy Disk  
floppy disk drive you are using.  
External USB  
If you eject the disk while the Floppy Disk  
Drive Access indicator is active, there is a  
risk of damaging the data on the disk, the  
disk itself or even the disk drive.  
Floppy Disk Drive*  
*Optional device  
An external USB floppy disk drive is available as an  
option for your LifeBook notebook. The external floppy  
disk drive can read and write information on removable  
1.44MB and 720KB floppy disks.  
PREPARING A DISK FOR USE  
Before you can use a new disk, it needs to be prepared  
so your LifeBook notebook knows where to store infor-  
mation. This preparation is called formatting or initial-  
izing a disk. You will need to format new disks, unless  
they are preformatted. (Please refer to your operating  
system manual for step-by-step instructions on formatting a  
disk)  
Your notebook is preconfigured to boot  
from a USB floppy drive. Reference the  
BIOS manual for further information on  
changing the default boot drive. The BIOS  
manual can be found on the Fujitsu Com-  
puter Systems support website: http//  
www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support.  
To prevent accidental erasure of the data stored on a  
disk, slide the “write protect” tab until a small hole is  
exposed. This sets the disk into a protected state where  
nothing can be added or removed. If you want to add or  
remove data on a protected disk, slide the “write  
protect” tab to close the small hole. (Figure 4-7)  
LOADING A DISK  
To load a disk into your disk drive, follow these easy  
steps:  
1. Orient the disk so that its label is facing upwards  
and the shutter side is pointing towards the drive.  
(Figure 4-6)  
Write Enabled  
2. Push the disk into the drive until the Eject button  
pops out and you hear a click.  
When there is no disk in the drive, the  
Eject button is flush with your notebook.  
Write Protected  
EJECTING A DISK  
To eject a disk from the disk drive, follow these easy  
steps:  
Figure 4-7. Floppy Disk Write Protect  
Formatting a floppy disk that already con-  
tains data will erase all of the information  
on the disk.  
1. Check that the Floppy Disk Drive Access indicator  
is inactive.  
2. Press the Eject button. This will push your disk  
partially out of the drive.  
3. Remove the disk.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 43 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
ExpressCard Slot  
PC Card Slot  
PC Card  
(bottom slot only)  
Eject Buttons  
Figure 4-8. Inserting/Removing PC Card  
1. See your PC Card manual for instructions on the  
insertion of your card. Some cards may require that  
your notebook is off while inserting them.  
PC Cards/ExpressCards™  
Your LifeBook notebook supports Type I and Type II PC  
Cards and ExpressCardsTM, which can perform a variety  
of functions depending on which type of card you insert.  
You can insert one or two cards at a time, depending on  
its type. PC Cards should be inserted in the bottom slot,  
and ExpressCards in the top slot.  
2. Make sure there is no PC Card currently in the slot.  
If there is, see Removing PC Cards.  
3. If the eject button is extended, press it until it clicks.  
4. Insert the card into the slot with the label facing up.  
5. Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in  
the connector.  
Some available PC/ExpressCards:  
Local area network (LAN) cards (Type II)  
IDE solid-state disk cards (Type II)  
SCSI cards (Type II)  
Other PC Cards that conform to PCMCIA 2.1 or  
REMOVING PC CARDS  
See your PC Card manual for specific instructions on  
removing your card. Some cards may require your note-  
book to be in Standby Mode or Off during removal.  
CardBus standards  
For further information, refer to the instructions  
supplied with your card(s).  
Windows has a shutdown procedure for  
PC Cards that must be followed before  
removing a card. (Review your operating  
system manual for the correct proce-  
dure.) It is good practice to remove  
devices using the Unplug or Eject Hard-  
ware icon in the system tray.  
INSERTING PC CARDS  
PC Cards are inserted in the PC Card slot (the lower of  
the two slots). To insert a PC Card, follow these steps:  
If the dialog box states that the device  
cannot be removed, you must save all of  
your open files, close any open applica-  
tions and shut down your notebook.  
Inserting or removing a PC Card during  
your LifeBook notebook’s shutdown or  
bootup process may damage the card  
and/or your LifeBook notebook.  
Do not insert a PC Card into a slot if  
there is water or any other substance on  
the card as you may permanently  
damage the card, your LifeBook note-  
book, or both.  
2. Unlock the card from the slot by pressing the eject  
button associated with the slot in which the card is  
located. When pressed, the button will pop out.  
3. Firmly press the button again until it is flush with  
the notebook. This will eject the card slightly out of  
the slot allowing you to remove the card.  
You may be required to log on as an  
Administrator or member of the Adminis-  
trator’s Group to complete this procedure.  
If the computer is connected to a network,  
network policy settings may also prevent  
you from completing this procedure.  
If the PC Card has an external connector  
and cable, do not pull the cable when  
removing the card.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 44 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
4. Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in  
the connector.  
INSERTING EXPRESSCARDS  
There are two different width ExpressCards: 34 mm and  
54 mm. The connector inside the slot is located on the  
left-hand side of the slot. If you insert a 34 mm card, be  
sure to align it with the left side of the slot when  
inserting it.  
REMOVING EXPRESSCARDS  
See your ExpressCard manual for specific instructions  
on removing your card. Some cards may require your  
notebook to be in Standby Mode or Off during removal.  
ExpressCards are inserted in the ExpressCard slot (the  
top slot). (Figure 4-9).  
Windows has a shutdown procedure for  
ExpressCards that must be followed  
before removing a card. (Review your  
operating system manual for the correct  
procedure.) It is good practice to remove  
devices using the Unplug or Eject Hard-  
ware icon in the system tray.  
54 mm ExpressCard  
34 mm ExpressCard  
If the dialog box states that the device  
cannot be removed, you must save all of  
your open files, close any open applica-  
tions and shut down your notebook.  
To remove an ExpressCard, follow these steps:  
2. Unlock the card from the slot by pressing the eject  
button associated with the slot in which the card is  
located. When pressed, the button will pop out.  
ExpressCard Slot  
(top slot)  
Figure 4-9. Inserting/Removing ExpressCards  
3. Firmly press the button again until it is flush with  
the notebook. This will eject the card slightly out of  
the slot allowing you to remove the card.  
Inserting or removing an ExpressCard  
during your notebook’s shutdown or  
bootup process may damage the card  
and/or your notebook.  
SMART CARD READER  
Do not insert an ExpressCard into a slot  
if there is water or any other substance  
on the card as you may permanently  
damage the card, your notebook, or  
both.  
An embedded Smart Card Reader is provided on your  
notebook. Smart Cards are the same size and shape as  
credit cards, but they contain an integrated micropro-  
cessor chip. The chip can hold a variety of different  
information, and provides you with many possible  
options, such as allowing you to make secure purchases,  
pay for phone calls, store security information, and  
provide personal identification and information.  
You may be required to log on as Adminis-  
trator or a member of the Administrator’s  
Group to complete this procedure. If your  
computer is connected to a network, net-  
work policy settings may also prevent you  
from completing this procedure.  
In order to use the embedded Smart Card Reader, you  
must purchase an optional Smart Card adapter and  
third-party software for insertion into an available Type  
II PC Card slot.  
See your ExpressCard manual for instructions on the  
insertion of your card. Some cards may require that your  
notebook is off while inserting them.  
To insert an ExpressCard, follow these steps:  
1. Make sure there is no ExpressCard currently in the  
slot. If there is, see Removing ExpressCards.  
2. If the eject button is extended, press it in until it  
clicks.  
3. Insert your ExpressCard into the slot with the  
product label facing up. If you are inserting a 34 mm  
card, be sure to align it with the left side of the slot  
when inserting it.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 45 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
Memory Upgrade Module  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook comes with a minimum  
of 256 MB of high speed Double Data Rate Synchronous  
Dynamic RAM (dual-channel DDR2 667 SDRAM)  
factory installed. To increase your LifeBook notebook’s  
memory capacity, you may install an additional memory  
upgrade module. The memory upgrade must be a DDR2  
667 MHz SO-DIMM module. To ensure 100% compati-  
bility, purchase the SDRAM module only from the  
Fujitsu web store at www.shopfujitsu.com.  
Figure 4-10. Opening the Memory Upgrade Compartment  
Do not remove any screws from the  
memory upgrade module compartment  
except the ones specifically shown in the  
directions for installing and removing the  
memory upgrade module.  
5. Remove the memory upgrade module from the  
static guarded sleeve.  
6. Align the memory upgrade module with the part  
side up. Align the connector edge of the memory  
upgrade module with the connector slot in the  
compartment.  
The memory upgrade module can be  
severely damaged by electrostatic dis-  
charge (ESD). To minimize risk to the  
module, observe the following precau-  
tions:  
7. Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45° angle.  
Press the connector edge of the module firmly down  
and into the connector until it lodges under the  
retaining clip. You will hear a click when it is prop-  
erly in place. (Figure 4-11)  
Before handling a memory module,  
touch a grounded metal object to  
discharge static electricity built up in  
your body.  
When installing or removing a  
memory module, hold it by the edge  
so as not to touch any contacts or  
chips. Be careful not to touch any  
internal computer terminals or  
components; the oil from your  
fingers could cause a short to the  
components.  
Be sure to power down your system  
before adding or removing memory  
modules. Even if the system is in  
hibernate or standby states, data  
could be lost or the memory could be  
damaged if power is still available to  
the system.  
Figure 4-11. Installing a Second Memory Module  
8. Replace the cover.(Figure 4-12)  
INSTALLING MEMORY UPGRADE MODULES  
1. Turn off power to your LifeBook notebook, remove  
any power adapter (AC or auto/airline), and remove  
the battery pack.  
9. Replace the screws.  
2. Make sure that all the connector covers are closed.  
3. Turn the notebook bottom side up, and remove the  
screws of the memory upgrade module compart-  
ment. (Figure 4-10)  
4. Remove the cover.  
Figure 4-12. Replacing the Memory Compartment Cover  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 46 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
CHECKING THE MEMORY CAPACITY  
The memory upgrade module is not  
something you routinely remove from  
your notebook. Once it is installed, you  
can leave it in place unless you want to  
change system memory capacity.  
Once you have changed the system memory capacity by  
replacing the installed module with a larger one, be sure  
to check that your notebook has recognized the change.  
Check the memory capacity by clicking [Start] ->  
Settings -> Control Panel, then double-clicking the  
System icon. Select the General tab and check the  
amount of memory under “Computer:.  
REMOVING A MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE  
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of Installing a Memory  
Upgrade Module.  
There may be a variation between the actual memory  
size and what is displayed. This is due to the fact that  
your system uses a video graphics chip which dynami-  
cally allocates system memory to accelerate graphics  
performance. Up to 128 MB of memory is dynamically  
shared on an as-needed basis using Dynamic Video  
Memory Technology (DVMT).  
2. Pull the clips sideways away from each side of the  
memory upgrade module at the same time.  
3. While holding the clips out, remove the module  
from the slot by lifting it up and pulling towards the  
rear of your notebook. (Figure 4-13)  
Intel shared graphics allocates 8 MB of  
the system memory for use as default  
video memory. If your system is config-  
ured with 512 MB of system memory,  
for example, only 504 MB will be dis-  
played in your system information.  
If the total memory displayed is incor-  
rect, check that your memory upgrade  
module is properly installed. (If the mod-  
ule is properly installed and the capacity  
is still not correctly recognized, see  
Troubleshooting on page 57.  
Figure 4-13. Removing a Memory Upgrade Module  
4. Store the memory upgrade module in a static  
guarded sleeve.  
5. Replace the cover. (Figure 4-12)  
6. Replace the screws.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 47 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
M e m o r y S t i c k / S D C a r d  
Memory Stick  
Note: A memory stick  
is used for purposes  
of illustration.  
Memory Stick/SD/xD-Picture Card Slot  
Figure 4-14. Inserting a Memory Stick/SD Card  
PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery  
consumption. Like the memory stick, it uses flash  
memory architecture.  
Memory Stick/Secure  
Digital/xD Card Slot  
xD-Picture Cards work the same as Memory Sticks and  
SD Cards, but they are much smaller than either one.  
xD-Picture Cards are primarily used to store and  
transfer images with devices such as cell phones.  
Your LifeBook notebook supports the following  
memory cards, on which you can store and transfer data  
to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use  
flash memory architecture, which means they don’t need  
a power source to retain data.  
SD Memory Card  
Mini SD Card  
Memory Stick Media  
Memory Stick Select Media  
Memory Stick Duo Media  
Memory Stick PRO Media  
xD-Picture Cards™  
Figure 4-15. Memory Stick, Secure Digital, and xD-Picture Cards  
• Some of the media in the above list may  
have more features than others.  
• An adapter is required for Memory Stick  
Duo and Mini SD Cards.  
• Copyright Protection Technology can-  
not be used.  
INSERTING MEMORY STICK/SD/XD CARDS  
Memory Sticks, SD Cards, and xD-Picture Cards are  
inserted in the Memory Stick/SD/xD-Picture Card slot  
(Figure 4-14). To insert a Memory Stick, SD Card or xD-  
Picture Card, follow these steps:  
• MultiMedia Cards (MMC) and Secure  
MMC are not supported.  
Inserting or removing a Memory Stick,  
SD Card, or xD-Picture Card during your  
notebook’s shutdown or bootup process  
may damage the card and/or your note-  
book.  
Memory Stick is a flash memory technology developed  
by Sony Electronics. Memory Stick allows you to record,  
transfer and share digital content, such as digital  
pictures, movies, music, voice, and computer data and  
applications.  
Do not insert a card into a slot if there is  
water or any other substance on the  
card as you may permanently damage  
the card, your LifeBook notebook, or  
both.  
Secure Digital (SD) Cards are very similar to Memory  
Sticks, but they are shorter. Like the Memory Stick, SD  
Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices,  
such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 48 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
1. See your Memory Stick, SD Card, or xD-Picture  
Card manual for instructions on the insertion of  
your card. Some cards may require that your note-  
book is off while inserting them.  
2. Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If  
there is, see Removing a Memory Stick/SD/xD-  
Picture Card.  
3. Insert your card into the slot with the product label  
facing up.  
4. Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in  
the connector.  
REMOVING A MEMORY STICK/SD/XD CARD  
To remove a Memory Stick, SD Card, or xD-Picture  
Card, follow these easy steps:  
See your card manual for specific  
instructions on the removal of your card.  
Some cards may require your LifeBook  
notebook to be in Standby Mode or Off  
while removing them.  
Push the Memory Stick, SD Card, or xD-Picture Card in  
until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for  
removal.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 49 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
Power On/Suspend/Resume Button  
DC Power Jack  
Headphone Jack  
Microphone  
Jack  
Lock Slot  
Lock Slot  
USB Ports  
PS/2 Port  
Parallel Port  
Serial Port  
DVI-D Port  
External Video Port  
LAN (RJ-45)Port  
Figure 4-16. Port Replicator back side  
PS/2 Keyboard/Mouse Port  
Port Replicator  
The PS/2 keyboard/mouse port allows you to connect  
external PS/2 devices such as an external PS/2 keyboard  
or mouse.  
An optional port replicator is available for your Fujitsu  
LifeBook notebook. The port replicator extends the  
functionality of your notebook by providing ports to  
connect PS/2 devices, a LAN (RJ-45) cable, USB devices,  
an external video device, a parallel device, a digital video  
device, and a serial device. The port replicator connects  
to the bottom of your notebook. (See Device Ports on  
page 52 for more information)  
Parallel Port  
The parallel port allows you to connect parallel devices.  
(This is sometimes referred to as an LPT port.)  
Serial Port  
The serial port allows you to connect serial (RS-232C)  
devices. (This is sometimes referred to as a COM port.)  
BACK PANEL COMPONENTS  
The following is a brief description of the port repli-  
cator’s back panel components. (Figure 4-16)  
Digital Video Interface (DVI-D)  
The DVI-D port allows you to connect a flat-panel LCD  
monitor or television that is equipped with a DVI-D  
port for ultra-crisp digital images and graphics.  
Power On/Suspend/Resume Button  
The power on/suspend/resume button allows you to  
power on or suspend/resume your system via the port  
replicator.  
External Video Port  
The external video port allows you to connect an  
external VGA or SVGA CRT monitor.  
DC Power Jack  
LAN (RJ-45) Jack  
The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter  
or the optional Auto/Airline adapter to power your note-  
book.  
The LAN port allows you to connect a LAN (RJ-45)  
cable. Note that when your notebook is connected to the  
port replicator, the LAN port on the system is not acces-  
sible; the port replicator LAN port is the only one that  
can be used when it as attached to the system.  
Anti-theft Lock Slots  
The anti-theft lock slots allow you to secure the port  
replicator with an optional security lock/cable.  
Microphone Jack  
USB Ports  
The microphone jack allows you to connect an external  
There are four USB 2.0 ports on the port replicator. USB  
2.0 ports allow you to connect any USB 2.0 device for up  
to 480 Mbps transfer rate. USB 2.0 is backward-compat-  
ible with USB 1.1 devices.  
mono microphone.  
Headphone Jack  
The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 50 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Alignment Bar  
Alignment Bar Release Latch  
Ground Contacts (4 places)  
Lift  
Latch  
Interface Connector  
Latch  
Port Replicator  
Latch Release  
Lift  
Figure 4-17. Port Replicator front side  
FRONT PANEL COMPONENTS  
The following is a brief description of the optional Port  
ATTACHING THE PORT REPLICATOR  
The port replicator can be attached to your notebook  
Replicator’s front panel components.  
while the power is on, while in standby mode, or while  
the power is off.  
Alignment Bar  
The alignment bar allows you to use the port replicator  
to accommodate different LifeBook models.  
Before docking or undocking your  
notebook with the port replicator, be sure  
to touch a grounded metal object to  
prevent electrostatic discharge from  
affecting the computer components.  
Alignment Bar Release Latch  
The alignment bar release latch allows the alignment bar  
to swing to a vertical position.  
Ground Contacts  
The AC adapter must be plugged into the  
port replicator in order to use all of the  
ports. If the adapter is connected to the  
system, several of the ports on the port  
replicator will not be usable.  
The ground contacts are designed to help protect your  
system by grounding it through the port replicator. Your  
LifeBook uses two of the four contacts, depending upon  
your notebook model.  
Port Replicator Latch Release  
The port replicator latch release allows you to disconnect  
the notebook from the port replicator. When the port  
replicator latch release is extended outwards, the Latches  
disengage and the Lifts raise the notebook slightly.  
To attach the port replicator, follow these steps:  
1. Unplug the AC adapter from the system if it is  
connected.  
2. Unplug any devices from the rear of the system (i.e.,  
USB and LAN).  
Interface Connector  
The interface connector connects the optional port  
2. The port replicator is designed to be used with a  
variety of system configurations. Your model -- the  
LifeBook S7100 -- requires that the alignment bar be  
vertical. To make the alignment bar vertical, slide the  
alignment bar release latch forward until the align-  
ment bar springs to a vertical position. (Figure 4-18)  
replicator to your notebook.  
Do not hold the system by the port repli-  
cator. The port replicator and/or the sys-  
tem could be damaged if the port  
replicator is used as a handle.  
The port replicator should only be used  
on a flat, stable surface.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 51 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
DETACHING THE PORT REPLICATOR  
The optional port replicator can be detached from your  
notebook while the power is on, while in standby mode,  
or while the power is off. To detach the port replicator  
follow these easy steps:  
1. Pull the port replicator latch release outwards.  
(Figure 4-20)  
2. While holding the port replicator latch release, lift  
your notebook to detach it from the port replicator.  
Figure 4-18. Changing the Alignment Bar  
3. With the alignment bar in vertical position, position  
the system so that the right side is aligned with the  
right stop. (Figure 4-19)  
Figure 4-20. Detaching the notebook  
Right  
stop  
Figure 4-19. Aligning the notebook  
4. Push your notebook down to connect it securely to  
the port replicator.  
5. Plug the AC adapter into the DC power jack and  
plug the other end into a power outlet.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 52 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
The internal modem is designed to the  
ITU-T V.90 standard. Its maximum  
speed of 53000bps is the highest  
allowed by FCC, and actual connection  
rate depends on the line conditions. The  
maximum speed is 33600bps at upload.  
Device Ports  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook and the optional Port  
Replicator come equipped with multiple ports to which  
you can connect external devices including: disk drives,  
keyboards, modems, printers, etc.  
The internal modem on all Fujitsu Life-  
Book notebooks from Fujitsu are certi-  
fied for use in the United States and  
Canada. The modem may be certified in  
other countries.  
MODEM (RJ-11) TELEPHONE JACK  
The modem (RJ-11) telephone jack is used for an  
internal modem. To connect the telephone cable follow  
these easy steps:  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
INTERNAL LAN (RJ-45) JACK  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for a Gigabit  
(10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T/Tx) Ethernet LAN  
connection. You may need to configure your notebook  
to work with your particular network. (Please refer to  
your network administrator for information on your  
network configuration.) To connect the LAN cable  
follow these easy steps:  
3. Plug the other end of the telephone cable into a  
telephone outlet. (Figure 4-21)  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is  
seated.(Figure 4-22)  
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN outlet.  
Figure 4-21. Connecting a Modem  
The modem sound is deactivated by default, to activate  
modem sound follow these easy steps:  
1. Right click on the Speaker icon in your system tray.  
2. Select Open Volume.  
3. Select Option/Properties.  
4. Under “Show the following volume controls, click  
on Phone and click OK.  
Figure 4-22. Connecting the LAN  
5. Uncheck the Mute box under Phone Balance.  
PARALLEL PORT  
The parallel port, or LPT port, located on the optional  
Port Replicator allows you to connect parallel devices,  
such as a printer to your notebook. In order to connect a  
parallel interface device follow these easy steps:  
The internal modem is not intended for  
use with Digital PBX systems. Do not con-  
nect the internal modem to a Digital PBX  
as it may cause serious damage to the  
internal modem or your entire LifeBook  
notebook. Consult your PBX manufac-  
turer’s documentation for details. Some  
hotels have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to  
find out BEFORE you connect your  
modem.  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is  
seated.(Figure 4-23)  
3. Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each  
end of the connector.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 53 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s  
these devices follow the instructions that came with your  
docking port. (See Figure 2-8 on page 11 for location)  
UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS PORTS  
The Universal Serial Bus 2.0 ports (USB) allow you to  
connect USB devices such as external game pads,  
pointing devices, keyboards and/or speakers.  
In order to connect a USB device follow these steps:  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
(Figure 4-25)  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
Figure 4-23. Connecting a Parallel Device to Port Replicator  
SERIAL PORT  
Due to the ongoing changes in USB tech-  
nology and standards, not all USB devices  
and/or drivers are guaranteed to work.  
The serial port, or COM port, located on the optional  
Port Replicator allows you to connect serial devices, such  
as printers or scanners. In order to connect a serial inter-  
face device follow these easy steps:  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
3. Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each  
end of the connector.  
PS/2 PORT  
The PS/2 port located on the optional Port Replicator  
allow you to connect an external keyboard or mouse. In  
order to connect a PS/2 interface device follow these easy  
steps:  
Figure 4-25. Connecting a USB Device  
INFRARED PORT  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.(Figure 4-  
The Infrared IrDA (4Mbps) port allows for wireless data  
transfer between your notebook and other IrDA-  
compatible devices, such as another computer or a  
printer, without the use of a cable. (See Figure 2-7 on  
page 10 for location)  
24)  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
A mouse or keyboard may be installed and  
automatically recognized by your note-  
book without restarting or changing set-  
ups.  
It is important to keep in mind that while carrying out  
this form of communication, both devices must be  
placed so their infrared ports are directly facing each  
other without obstruction. The devices must also be  
separated by at least 6" but no more than 36" for  
maximum performance.  
The following conditions may interfere with infrared  
communications:  
A television, radio remote control unit, or a wireless  
headphone is being used nearby.  
Direct sunlight, fluorescent light, or incandescent light  
shines directly on the port.  
Do not move either device while com-  
Figure 4-24. Connecting a PS/2 Device  
munication is active as it may interrupt  
data transmission.  
DOCKING PORT  
The docking port is used for the connection of your  
notebook to an optional port replicator or docking  
station. In order to connect your notebook to one of  
Be careful not to scratch the infrared  
port lens. Dirt, scratches, or other sur-  
face marks can degrade operation.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 54 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
S-VIDEO OUT PORT (TV OUT)  
(Figure 4-27)  
The S-Video port allows you to connect and use directly  
any S-Video device, such as a VCR or television. The  
S-Video standard provides for a higher quality picture  
than NTSC or PAL. In order to connect an S-Video  
device, follow these easy steps: (Figure 4-26)  
HEADPHONE/LINE OUT JACK  
The headphone/line-out jack supports 2-channel High  
Definition (HD) audio for greatly a enhanced multi-  
media experience.  
1. Attach the mini S-Video cable adapter (included  
with your system accessories) to the S-Video cable  
from the device.  
The headphone/line out jack allows you to connect  
headphones or powered external speakers. In order to  
connect headphones or speakers follow these easy steps:  
2. Align the connector with the port opening.  
1. Align the connector (3.5 mm stereo mini-jack) with  
the port opening.  
3. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
When S-Video is connected, you can toggle the S-Video  
device on and off by pressing the [F11] key while  
holding down the [Fn] key.  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
If you plug headphones into the  
headphone jack, you will disable the built-  
in stereo speakers.  
Mini S-Video  
Adapter  
MICROPHONE/STEREO LINE-IN JACK  
The microphone/stereo line-in jack allows you to  
connect an external microphone or an external audio  
source such as an audio cassette player to your note-  
book. Your audio device must be equipped with a 1/8"  
(3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug in order to fit into the stereo  
line-in jack of your notebook. To connect a external  
audio source: (See Figure 2-5 on page 8 for location)  
S-Video Cable  
Figure 4-26. Connecting the S-Video Cable Adapter  
IEEE 1394 PORT  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
The 4-pin 1394 port allows you to connect digital  
devices that are compliant with IEEE 1394 standard. The  
IEEE 1394 standard is easy to use, connect, and discon-  
nect. This port can allow up to 400 Mbps transfer rate. A  
third-party application may be required to operate your  
digital device with the 1394 port.  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
Turn down the audio volume when  
connecting electronic devices to the line-in  
jack. The internal speakers might break if  
unexpected large sounds are input.  
EXTERNAL VIDEO PORT  
The external video port allows you to connect an external  
monitor or LCD projector. In order to connect an  
external video device, follow these easy steps: (See  
Figure 2-7 on page 10 for location)  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated.  
3. Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each  
end of the connector.  
Figure 4-27. Connecting an IEEE 1394 Device  
The 1394 port in this system uses a four-  
pin configuration. If you want to interface  
with devices which use a six-pin configura-  
tion, you will need to purchase an adapter.  
Pressing the [Fn] + [F10] keys allows you  
to change your selection of where to send  
your display video. Each time you press the  
key combination, you will step to the next  
choice, starting with the built-in display  
panel only, moving to the external device  
only, finally moving to both the built-in  
display panel and an external device.  
In order to connect a 1394 device, follow these steps:  
1. Align the connector with the port opening.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 55 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
5
Troubleshooting  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 56 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 57 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Troubleshooting  
Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook is sturdy and subject to  
few problems in the field. However, you may encounter  
simple setup or operating problems that you can solve  
on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices, that  
you can solve by replacing the device. The information  
in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these  
straightforward problems and identify failures that  
require service.  
8. If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Trou-  
bleshooting Table without success, contact your  
support representative:  
Toll free: 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487)  
Website:  
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support.  
Before you place the call, you should have the following  
information ready so that the customer support represen-  
tative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:  
IDENTIFYING THE PROBLEM  
If you encounter a problem, go through the following  
procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:  
Product name  
Product configuration number  
Product serial number  
1. Turn off your LifeBook notebook.  
Purchase date  
2. Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your note-  
book and to an active AC power source.  
Conditions under which the problem occurred  
Any error messages that have occurred  
Hardware configuration  
3. Make sure that any card inserted in the PC Card slot  
is seated properly. You can also remove the card  
from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause  
of failure.  
Type of device connected, if any  
See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your  
notebook for configuration and serial numbers. (See  
figure 2-8 on page 11 for location)  
4. Make sure that any devices connected to the external  
connectors are plugged in properly. You can also  
disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as  
possible causes of failure.  
SPECIFIC PROBLEMS  
Using the Troubleshooting Table  
5. Turn on your notebook. Make sure it has been off at  
least 10 seconds before you turn it back on.  
When you have problems with your LifeBook notebook,  
try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of  
the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you  
difficulty. You will find a description of common causes  
for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and  
what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition  
under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions  
may not apply to your notebook.  
6. Go through the boot sequence.  
7. If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the  
Troubleshooting Table, that follows, for more  
detailed troubleshooting information.  
If you keep notes about what you have  
tried, your support representative may be  
able to help you more quickly by giving  
additional suggestions over the phone.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 58 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE  
Problem  
Problem  
Page  
Page  
Modem Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 60  
Parallel, Serial and USB Device Problems . . . . . page 60  
PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 60  
Power Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 61  
Shutdown and Startup Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . page 62  
Video Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 63  
Miscellaneous Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 65  
Audio Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 58  
DVD/CD-ROM Drive Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . page 58  
Port Replicator Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 59  
Floppy Disk Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 59  
Hard Drive Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 59  
Keyboard or Mouse Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 59  
Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 60  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
Audio Problems  
There is no sound coming  
from the built-in speakers.  
The volume is turned too low. Adjust the volume control on your notebook.  
The software volume control is Adjust the sound volume control settings in your  
set too low.  
software, operating system and applications.  
Headphones are plugged into  
your notebook.  
Plugging in headphones disables the built-in  
speakers, remove the headphones.  
BIOS audio settings  
are incorrect.  
Set the BIOS setup utility to the default values within  
the Multimedia Device Configuration menu. (See  
BIOS Setup Utility on page 29 for more information)  
Software driver is not  
configured correctly.  
Refer to your application and operating system  
documentation for help.  
The speakers have been muted Click on the Volume icon in the tool tray on the  
using the Volume icon in the  
system tray.  
bottom right of the screen. (It looks like a speaker).  
If the Mute box is checked, click on it to uncheck it.  
DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM Drive Problems  
LifeBook notebook fails to The disc is not pushed down  
Open the media drive tray and re-install the disc  
recognize DVD/CD-RW/  
CD-ROM’s.  
onto raised center circle of the properly.  
drive.  
Media drive tray is not latched Push on the front of the media drive tray until it  
shut.  
latches.  
Incorrect DVD Player or no  
DVD Player software is  
installed.  
Re-install the DVD player software using the CD  
that came with your system. (See “Media Player Soft-  
ware” on page 37 for more information.)  
Wrong drive designator was  
Verify the drive designator used by the application is  
used for the media drive in the the same as the one used by the operating system.  
application.  
When the operating system is booted from a DVD/  
CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted.  
Note that the drive designation can be changed with  
the Disk Management tool located at Administrative  
Tools -> Computer Management.  
Windows DVD/CD-RW/CD-  
ROM auto insertion function  
is disabled.  
Start the media drive from the desktop or applica-  
tion software or re-enable the Windows DVD/CD-  
RW/CD-ROM auto insertion function.  
LifeBook notebook fails to Disc is dirty or defective.  
recognize DVD/CD-RW/  
CD-ROM’s.  
Wipe the disc with a non-abrasive CD cleaning cloth  
and reinsert. It if still will not work try another disc  
in the drive.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 59 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
The Media Player Drive  
Access indicator on the  
Status Indicator Panel  
blinks at regular intervals  
when no disc is in the tray  
or the optical drive is not  
installed.  
The Windows DVD/CD-RW/ This is normal; however, you may disable this feature.  
CD-ROM auto insertion func-  
tion is active and is checking to  
see if a disc is ready to run.  
Port Replicator Problems  
Note: Be sure to power down your LifeBook notebook before adding a printer to the Port Replicator parallel port.  
LifeBook notebook does  
Port Replicator AC adapter is  
Provide power to the Port Replicator.  
not turn on when installed not plugged in.  
in the optional Port  
Notebook is not properly  
Remove and re-dock your LifeBook notebook.  
Replicator  
seated in the Port Replicator.  
Floppy Disk Drive Problems  
You cannot access your  
floppy disk.  
You tried to write to a write  
protected floppy disk.  
Eject the floppy disk and set it to write enable.  
(See Preparing a Disk for Use on page 42 for more  
information)  
Floppy disk is not loaded  
correctly.  
Eject floppy disk, check orientation and re-insert.  
(See Ejecting a Disk on page 42 for more information)  
The floppy disk drive may not Remove and re-install your floppy disk drive.  
be properly installed.  
Security is set to protect access Verify your password and security settings.  
to floppy disk data.  
Hard Drive Problems  
You cannot access your  
hard drive.  
The setup utility is incorrectly Revise BIOS settings to set both Primary Master  
set for your internal (Primary and Primary Slave correctly. (See BIOS Setup Utility  
Master) or optional second  
hard drive (Primary Slave).  
on page 29 for more information)  
The wrong drive designator  
was used by an application  
Verify drive designator used by application is in  
use by the operating system. When the operating  
when a bootable CD-ROM was system is booted from a CD, drive designations  
used to start the notebook.  
are automatically adjusted.  
Security is set so your oper-  
ating system cannot be started  
without a password.  
Verify your password and security settings.  
Keyboard or Mouse Problems  
The built-in keyboard does The notebook has gone into  
Push the Power/Suspend/Resume button.  
not seem to work.  
Standby mode.  
Your application has locked  
out your keyboard.  
Try to use your integrated pointing device to restart  
your system.  
You have installed an  
external keyboard or  
mouse, and it does not  
seem to work.  
Your external device is not  
properly installed.  
Re-install your device. (See Device Ports on page 52  
for more information)  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 60 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
You have installed an  
external keyboard or  
mouse, and it does not  
seem to work.  
Your operating system soft-  
ware is not set up with the  
correct software driver.  
Check your device and operating system docu-  
mentation and activate the proper driver.  
(continued)  
You have connected an  
external keyboard or a  
mouse and it seems to be  
locking up the system.  
Your operating system soft-  
ware is not set up with the  
correct software driver for that  
device.  
Check your device and operating system  
documentation and activate the proper driver.  
Your system has crashed.  
Try to restart your notebook. I  
Memory Problems  
Your Power On screen, or  
Main menu of the BIOS  
setup utility information,  
does not show the correct  
amount of installed  
Your memory upgrade module Remove and re-install your memory upgrade  
is not properly installed.  
module. (See Memory Upgrade Module on page 45  
for more information)  
You have a memory failure.  
Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages.  
(See Power On Self Test Messages on page 66 for more  
information)  
memory.  
Modem Problems  
Messages about modem  
operation.  
Messages about modem  
operation are generated by  
whichever modem application  
is in use.  
See your application software documentation for  
additional information.  
Parallel, Serial, and USB Device Problems  
You have installed a parallel The device is not properly  
Remove and re-install the device. (See Device Ports  
port device, a serial port  
device or a USB device.  
Your LifeBook notebook  
does not recognize the  
device, or the device does  
not seem to work properly.  
installed.  
on page 52 for more information)  
The device may have been  
Close the application and restart your notebook.  
installed while an application  
was running, so your notebook  
is not aware of its installation.  
Your device may not have the  
correct software driver active.  
See your software documentation and activate the  
correct driver.  
You may have the wrong I/O  
address selected for your  
device.  
See your device documentation and software docu-  
mentation to determine the required I/O address.  
Change the settings in the BIOS setup utility. (See  
BIOS Setup Utility on page 29 for more information)  
Your device and another device Check all I/O addresses located within the BIOS  
are assigned the same I/O  
address.  
setup utility and any other installed hardware or  
software to make sure there are no duplications.  
Parallel port is set to output  
only.  
Check parallel port setting in the BIOS and set to  
bi-directional or ECP.  
PC Card Problems  
A card inserted in the PC  
The card is not properly  
Remove and re-insert the card. (See PC Cards/  
Card slot does not work or inserted.  
is locking up the system.  
ExpressCards™ on page 43 for more information)  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 61 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
A card inserted in the PC  
The card may have been  
Close the application and restart your notebook.  
Card slot does not work or inserted while an application  
is locking up the system.  
was running, so your notebook  
is not aware of its insertion.  
(continued)  
Your software may not have  
the correct software driver  
active.  
See your software documentation and activate the  
correct driver.  
You may have the wrong I/O  
address selected for your PC  
Card device.  
See your PC Card documentation to determine  
the required I/O address. Change the settings in  
the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 29 for  
more information)  
Your PC Card device and  
Check all I/O addresses located within the BIOS  
another device are assigned the setup utility and any other installed hardware or  
same I/O address.  
software to make sure there are no duplications.  
Power Failures  
You turn on your  
The installed primary battery  
Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the  
LifeBook notebook and  
nothing seems to happen.  
is completely discharged, there presence and condition of the batteries. (See Status  
is no optional second battery  
installed or there is no power  
adapter (AC or Auto/Airline)  
installed.  
Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information)  
Install a charged battery or a Power adapter.  
The primary battery is  
installed but is faulty.  
Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the presence  
and condition of the batteries. (See Status Indicator  
Panel on page 12 for more information) If a battery is  
indicating a short, remove that battery and operate  
from another power source or replace that battery.  
The battery or batteries are low. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the  
presence and condition of the batteries. (See Status  
Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information) Use  
a power adapter to operate until a battery is charged  
or install a charged battery.  
The power adapter (AC or  
auto/airline) is not plugged  
in properly.  
Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. (See  
Power Sources on page 27 for more information)  
The power adapter (AC or  
auto/airline) has no power  
from the AC outlet, airplane  
Move the AC cord to a different outlet, check for a  
line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the AC  
outlet. If you are using an auto/airline adapter in a  
seat jack, or the car’s cigarette car make sure the ignition switch is in the On or  
lighter.  
Accessories position.  
The power adapter (AC or  
auto/airline) is faulty.  
Try a different power adapter or install a charged  
optional second battery.  
Your LifeBook notebook  
turns off all by itself.  
The power management  
parameters are set for auto  
timeouts which are too short  
for your operating needs.  
Press any button on the keyboard, or move the  
mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the  
Power/Suspend/Resume button. Check your power  
management settings, or close your applications and  
go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to  
adjust the timeout values to better suit your needs.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 62 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
Your LifeBook notebook  
turns off all by itself.  
You are operating on battery  
power only and have ignored a Suspend/Resume button. (See Power Sources on  
Install a power adapter and then push the Power/  
low battery alarm until the  
batteries are all at the dead  
battery state and your machine  
has gone into Dead Battery  
Suspend mode.  
page 27 for more information)  
(continued)  
You have a battery failure.  
Verify the condition of the batteries using the  
Status Indicator panel, and replace or remove  
any batteries that are shorted. (See Status Indicator  
Panel on page 12 for more information)  
Your power adapter has failed Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet  
or lost its power source.  
has power.  
Your LifeBook notebook  
will not work on battery  
alone.  
The installed batteries are  
dead.  
Replace the battery with a charged one or install  
a Power adapter.  
No batteries are installed.  
Install a charged battery.  
The batteries are improperly  
installed.  
Verify that the batteries are properly connected  
by re-installing them.  
Your installed batteries  
are faulty.  
Verify the condition of the batteries using the  
Status Indicator panel and replace or remove  
any batteries that are shorted. (See Status Indicator  
Panel on page 12 for more information)  
The batteries seem to  
discharge too quickly.  
You are running an application Use both the primary battery and an optional  
that uses a great deal of power second battery and/or use a power adapter for this  
due to frequent hard drive or  
media drive access or use of a  
modem or LAN PC card.  
application when at all possible.  
The power savings features  
may be disabled.  
Check the power management and/or setup utility  
settings in the Power Savings menu and adjust  
according to your operating needs.  
The brightness is turned all  
the way up.  
Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher  
the brightness the more power your display uses.  
The batteries are very old or  
have been exposed to high  
temperatures.  
Replace the batteries.  
The batteries are too hot  
or too cold.  
Restore the notebook to normal operating tempera-  
ture. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator  
Panel will flash when the battery is outside its  
operating range.  
Shutdown and Startup Problems  
The Suspend/Resume  
button does not work.  
The Suspend/Resume button  
Enable the button from the setup utility.  
is disabled from the Advanced  
submenu of the Power menu  
of the setup utility.  
You did not hold the button  
in long enough.  
Hold the button longer. This may need to be a few  
seconds if your application is preventing the CPU  
from checking for button pushes.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 63 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
The Suspend/Resume  
button does not work.  
There may be a conflict with  
the application software.  
Close all applications and try the button again.  
(continued)  
The system powers up, and The boot sequence settings  
displays power on informa- of the setup utility are not  
Set the operating source by pressing the [ESC] key  
while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2]  
key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source  
settings from the Boot menu. (See BIOS Setup  
Utility on page 29 for more information)  
tion, but fails to load the  
operating system.  
compatible with your  
configuration.  
You have a secured system  
requiring a password to load  
your operating system.  
Make sure you have the right password. Enter the  
setup utility and verify the Security settings and  
modify them as accordingly. (See BIOS Setup Utility  
on page 29 for more information)  
Internal hard drive was  
not detected.  
Use the BIOS setup utility or Primary Master  
submenu, located within the Main menu, to try to  
auto detect the internal hard drive.  
An error message is  
displayed on the screen  
during the notebook  
(boot) sequence.  
Power On Self Test (POST) has See the Power On Self Test (POST) messages to  
detected a problem.  
determine the meaning and severity of the problem.  
Not all messages are errors; some are simply status  
indicators. (See Power On Self Test Messages on  
page 66 for more information)  
Your notebook appears to  
change setup parameters  
when you start it.  
BIOS setup changes were not  
saved when you made them  
and exited the BIOS setup  
utility returning it to  
Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when  
exiting the BIOS setup utility.  
previous settings.  
The BIOS CMOS hold-up  
battery has failed.  
Contact your support representative for repairs.  
This is not a user serviceable part but has a normal  
life of 3 to 5 years.  
Your system display won’t  
The system may be password- Check the status indicator panel to verify that the  
turn on when the system is protected.  
turned on or when the  
Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your  
password.  
system has resumed.  
Video Problems  
The built-in display is  
blank when you turn on  
your LifeBook notebook.  
Something is pushing on the  
Closed Cover switch.  
Clear the Closed Cover switch. (See figure 2-4 on  
page 6 for location)  
The notebook is set for an  
external device only.  
Pressing [F10] while holding down the [Fn] key  
allows you to change your selection of where to  
send your display video. Each time you press the  
combination of keys you will step to the next  
choice. The choices, in order are: built-in display  
only, external monitor only, both built-in display  
and external monitor.  
The angle of the display and  
Move the display and the brightness control until  
the brightness settings are not you have adequate visibility.  
adequate for your lighting  
conditions.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 64 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
The built-in display is  
blank when you turn on  
your LifeBook notebook.  
The power management time- Press any button the keyboard, or move the mouse  
outs may be set for very short  
intervals and you failed to  
notice the display come on  
and go off again.  
to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/  
Suspend/Resume button. (The display may be shut  
off by Standby mode, Auto Suspend or Video  
Timeout)  
(continued)  
The LifeBook notebook  
turned on with a series of  
beeps and your built-in  
display is blank.  
Power On Self Test (POST)  
has detected a failure which  
does not allow the display  
to operate.  
Contact your support representative.  
The display goes blank by  
itself after you have been  
using it.  
The notebook has gone into  
Video timeout, Standby mode, mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the  
Standby mode or Save-to-Disk Power/Suspend/Resume button. Check your power  
Press any button on the keyboard, or move the  
mode because you have not  
used it for a period of time.  
management settings, or close your applications  
and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup  
utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit  
your operation needs. (See BIOS Setup Utility on  
page 29 for more information)  
The power management time- Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse  
outs may be set for very short  
intervals and you failed to  
notice the display come on  
and go off again.  
to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/  
Suspend/Resume button. (The display may be shut  
off by Standby Mode, Auto Suspend or Video  
Timeout)  
Something is pushing on the  
Closed Cover switch.  
Check the Closed Cover switch. (See figure 2-4 on  
page 6 for location)  
Your system display won’t  
The system may be password- Check the status indicator panel to verify that the  
turn on when the system is protected.  
turned on or when the  
Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your  
password.  
system has resumed.  
The display does not close. A foreign object, such as a  
paper clip, is stuck between the  
Remove all foreign objects from the keyboard.  
This is normal; do nothing.  
display and the keyboard.  
The display has bright or  
dark spots.  
If the spots are very tiny and  
few in number, this is normal  
for a large LCD display.  
If the spots are numerous or  
large enough to interfere with  
your operation needs.  
Display is faulty; contact your support representative.  
The application display  
uses only a portion of your that does not support 800 x  
screen and is surrounded  
by a dark frame.  
You are running an application Display compression gives a clearer but smaller  
display for applications that do not support 800 x  
600/1024 x 768 pixel resolution 600/1024 x 768 pixel resolution. You can fill the  
display and display compres-  
sion is enabled.  
screen but have less resolution by changing your  
display compression setting, (See the Video Features  
submenu, located within the Advanced menu of the  
BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 29 for more  
information)  
The display is dark when on The Power Management utility Press [Fn] + [F7] to increase brightness or double-  
battery power. default is set on low brightness click on the battery gauge and adjust Power Control  
to conserve power. under battery settings.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 65 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solutions  
You have connected an  
external video device and it enable your external device.  
does not display any  
information.  
Your BIOS setup is not set to  
Try toggling the video destination by pressing [Fn]  
and [F10] together, or check your BIOS setup and  
enable your external monitor. (See the Video Features  
submenu, located within the Advanced Menu of the  
BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 29 for more  
information)  
Your external video device is  
not properly installed.  
Reinstall your device. (See External Video Port on  
page 54 for more information)  
Your operating system soft-  
ware is not setup with the  
correct software driver for  
that device.  
Check your device and operating system  
documentation and activate the proper driver.  
You have connected an  
Your external device is not  
See your monitor documentation and the Video  
external video device and it compatible with your LifeBook Specifications section. (See Specifications on page 79  
does not come on.  
notebook.  
for more information)  
Miscellaneous Problems  
An error message is  
displayed on the screen  
during the operation of  
an application.  
Application software often  
has its own set of error  
message displays.  
See your application manual and help displays  
screens for more information. Not all messages are  
errors some may simply be status.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 66 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
*Incorrect Drive A type – run SETUP  
POWER ON SELF TEST MESSAGES  
Type of floppy drive A: not correctly identified in Setup.  
This means that the floppy disk drive type identified in  
your setup utility does not agree with the type detected  
by the Power On Self Test. Run the setup utility to  
correct the inconsistency.  
The following is an alphabetic list of error-and-status  
messages that Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating  
system can generate and an explanation of each message.  
Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message  
is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and  
check your operating system documentation both on  
screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference  
to the message and its meaning is not clear, contact  
your support representative for assistance.  
*Incorrect Drive B type – run SETUP  
Type of floppy drive B: not correctly identified in Setup.  
This means that the floppy disk drive type identified in  
your setup utility does not agree with the type detected  
by the Power On Self Test. Run the setup utility to  
correct the inconsistency.  
nnnn Cache SRAM Passed  
Where nnnn is the amount of system cache in kilobytes  
success-fully tested by the Power On Self Test. (This can  
only appear if you have an SRAM PC Card inserted.)  
*Invalid NVRAM media type  
Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that  
you see this message you may have some display prob-  
lems. You can continue operating but should contact  
your support representative for more information.  
*Diskette drive A error or Diskette drive B error  
Drive A: or B: is present but fails the BIOS Power On Self  
Test diskette tests. Check to see that the drive is defined  
with the proper diskette type in the Setup Utility, (See  
BIOS Setup Utility on page 29 for more information) and  
that the diskette drive is installed correctly. If the disk  
drive is properly defined and installed, avoid using it and  
contact your support representative.  
*Keyboard controller error  
The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to  
replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may  
be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact  
your support representative.  
*Extended RAM Failed at offset: nnnn  
*Keyboard error  
Extended memory not working or not configured prop-  
erly. If you have an installed memory upgrade module,  
verify that the module is properly installed. If it is prop-  
erly installed, you may want to check your Windows  
Setup to be sure it is not using unavailable memory  
until you can contact your support representative.  
Keyboard not working. You may have to replace your  
keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to  
use an external keyboard until then. Contact your  
support representative.  
*Keyboard error nn  
BIOS discovered a stuck key and displays the scan code  
for the stuck key. You may have to replace your keyboard  
but may be able to use an external keyboard until then.  
Contact your support representative.  
nnnn Extended RAM Passed  
Where nnnn is the amount of memory in kilobytes  
successfully tested.  
*Failing Bits: nnnn The hex number nnnn  
*Monitor type does not match CMOS – Run SETUP  
Monitor type not correctly identified in Setup. This error  
probably means your BIOS is corrupted, run the setup  
utility and set all settings to the default conditions. If you  
still get this error, contact your support representative.  
This is a map of the bits at the memory address (in  
System, Extended, or Shadow memory) which failed the  
memory test. Each 1 (one) in the map indicates a failed  
bit. This is a serious fault that may cause you to lose data  
if you continue. Contact your support representative.  
*Operating system not found  
*Fixed Disk x Failure or Fixed Disk Controller  
Failure (where x = 1-4)  
Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or  
drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed  
disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the  
boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed  
your installation greatly, the operating system should be  
on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard  
drive may be corrupted.  
The fixed disk is not working or not configured properly.  
This may mean that the hard drive type identified in  
your setup utility does not agree with the type detected  
by the Power On Self Test. Run the setup utility to check  
for the hard drive type settings and correct them if  
necessary. If the settings are OK and the message appears  
when you restart the system, there may be a serious fault  
which might cause you to lose data if you continue.  
Contact your support representative.  
*Parity Check 1 nnnn  
Parity error found in the system bus. BIOS attempts  
to locate the address and display it on the screen. If it  
cannot locate the address, it displays ????. This is a  
potentially data destroying failure. Contact your  
support representative.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 67 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
*Parity Check 2 nnnn  
nnnn System RAM Passed  
Parity error found in the I/O bus. BIOS attempts to  
locate the address and display it on the screen. If it  
cannot locate the address, it displays ????. This is a  
potentially data-destroying failure. Contact your  
support representative.  
Where nnnn is the amount of system memory in  
kilobytes successfully tested.  
*System timer error  
The timer test failed. The main clock that operates the  
computer is faulty. Requires repair of system board.  
Contact your support representative for repairs.  
*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP  
Displayed after any recoverable error message. Press  
the [F1] key to continue the boot process or the [F2]  
key to enter Setup and change any settings.  
UMB upper limit segment address: nnnn  
Displays the address of the upper limit of Upper  
Memory Blocks, indicating released segments of the  
BIOS memory which may be reclaimed by a virtual  
memory manager.  
*Previous boot incomplete –  
Default configuration used  
Previous Power On Self Test did not complete success-  
fully. The Power On Self Test will load default values and  
offer to run Setup. If the previous failure was caused by  
incorrect values and they are not corrected, the next  
boot will likely fail also. If using the default settings does  
not allow you to complete a successful boot sequence,  
you should turn off the power and contact your support  
representative.  
Video BIOS shadowed  
Video BIOS successfully copied to shadow RAM.  
EMERGENCY OPTICAL DRIVE TRAY RELEASE  
If for some reason the eject button fails, you can open  
the DVD/CD-ROM tray with a paper clip or similar tool  
inserted into the eject hole in the far right side of the  
front of the tray. Straighten one side of a paper clip  
and push it gently into the hole. The tray will pop out  
a short distance.  
*Real time clock error  
Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair.  
Contact your support representative.  
MODEM RESULT CODES  
*Shadow RAM Failed at offset: nnnn  
The operating system and application software that is  
factory installed detects the modem characteristics and  
provides the necessary command strings to operate the  
modem. The internal modem operation is controlled by  
generic AT commands from the operating system and  
application software. The standard long form result  
codes may, in some cases, be displayed on your screen to  
keep you informed of the actions of your modem. The  
operating system and application software may suppress  
display of the result codes.  
Shadow RAM failed at offset nnnn of the 64k block at  
which the error was detected. You are risking data corrup-  
tion if you continue. Contact your support representative.  
nnnn Shadow RAM Passed  
Where nnnn is the amount of shadow RAM in kilobytes  
successfully tested.  
*System battery is dead – Replace and run SETUP  
The BIOS CMOS RAM memory hold up battery is dead.  
This is part of your BIOS and is a board mounted  
battery which requires a support representative to  
change. You can continue operating but you will have to  
use setup utility default values or reconfigure your setup  
utility every time you turn off your notebook. This  
battery has an expected life of 2 to 3 years.  
Examples of result codes are:  
OK  
NO CARRIER  
NO DIALTONE  
CONNECT 53000 (Connection complete at  
System BIOS shadowed  
System BIOS copied to shadow RAM.  
53,000 bps.)  
ERROR  
FAX  
RING (This means an incoming call.)  
BUSY  
NO ANSWER  
*System CMOS checksum bad – run SETUP  
BIOS CMOS RAM has been corrupted or modified  
incorrectly, perhaps by an application program that  
changes data stored in BIOS memory. Run Setup and  
reconfigure the system.  
When using the internal modem with applications that  
are not factory installed refer to the application  
documentation.  
*System RAM Failed at offset: nnnn  
System memory failed at offset nnnn of in the 64k block  
at which the error was detected. This means that there is  
a fault in your built-in memory. If you continue to  
operate, you risk corrupting your data. Contact your  
support representative for repairs.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 68 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
blue-coded components; you must select grey and  
green components separately.  
Restoring Your  
5. Once you have selected the components you wish to  
install, click [Install Selected Subsystems]; the  
components will be installed.  
Pre-installed Software  
The Drivers and Applications Restore (DAR) DVD  
contains sets of device drivers and Fujitsu utilities (in  
specific directories) that are unique to your computer  
configuration for use as documented below.  
6. After the components are installed, click [OK], then  
click [Yes] when asked if you want to reboot the  
system.  
In order to install applications and/or  
drivers from the DAR DVD, you will need to  
connect a DVD drive either in your system  
or attached externally.  
RESTORING THE FACTORY IMAGE  
The Restore DVD that came with your system contains  
two utilities:  
The Recovery utility allows you to restore the original  
contents of the C: drive.  
If you have access to the internet, visit the  
Fujitsu Support website at http://  
www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support to  
check for the most current information,  
drivers and hints on how to perform  
recovery and system updates.  
The Hard Disk Data Delete utility on this disc is used  
to delete all data on your hard disk and prevent it from  
being reused. Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete  
utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want  
to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions.  
• The use of this disc requires that you  
have a device capable of reading DVDs  
attached to your system. If you do not  
have a built-in DVD player, you will need  
to attach an external player. For more  
information on available external devices,  
visit our Website at:  
Re-Installing Individual Drivers and Applications  
The Drivers and Applications DVD can be used to  
selectively re-install drivers and/or applications that may  
have been un-installed or corrupted.  
There may be certain free third-party  
applications pre-installed on your system  
that are not on the DAR CD. The latest  
versions of the applications can be  
www.shopfujitsu.com.  
• This disc can only be used with the  
system with which it was purchased.  
downloaded from the third-party’s website.  
BOOT Priority Change  
To re-install drivers and/or applications:  
Before restoring an image, you must first verify that your  
system is set up to boot from the DVD drive. There are  
two ways to verify/change the boot-up priority (rather  
than booting-up from the hard drive or an external  
floppy disk drive):  
1. Boot up the system and insert the DAR DVD after  
Windows has started. A Fujitsu Installer screen is  
displayed after the DVD is inserted.  
2. After reading the License Agreement, click [I agree].  
3. A window will appear containing a list of applica-  
tions, drivers, and utilities that you can install from  
the Drivers and Applications DVD.  
Changing BOOT priority using the [F12] button:  
1. Start your system and press the [F12] key when the  
Fujitsu logo appears.  
The components listed are color-coded in  
terms of their install status. Blue indicates  
that the component can be installed. Green  
indicates that the component needs to be  
installed separately. Grey indicates a  
component that is already installed; grey  
items can be reinstalled, but prior to  
installation you will receive a reminder that  
the component is already installed.  
2. Select the drive you want to use for booting.  
Changing BOOT priority from the BIOS Setup Utility:  
1. Start your system and press the [F2] key when the  
Fujitsu logo appears. You will enter the BIOS Setup  
Utility.  
2. Using the arrow keys, go to the Boot menu.  
3. Arrow down to the Boot Device Priority submenu.  
Press [Enter].  
4. In the list, check off all the components you want to  
install. If you want to install all components, click  
[Select All]. Clicking [Select All] will select all of the  
4. If “Optical Media Drive” or “CD-ROM Drive” is not  
at the top of the list, arrow down to the drive in the  
list, and press the space bar (or the + key) to move it  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 69 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
to the top of the list. (The system attempts to boot  
from the devices in the order in which they are  
listed.). Note that the BIOS for some systems will  
indicate “CD-ROM Drive, even when a DVD drive  
is connected.  
AUTOMATICALLY DOWNLOADING  
DRIVER UPDATES  
Your system has a convenient tool called the Fujitsu  
Driver Update (FDU) utility. With FDU, you can choose  
to automatically or manually go to the Fujitsu site to  
check for new updates for your system.  
5. If you have an external DVD drive connected,  
proceed to the next step; otherwise, proceed to  
step 7.  
The FDU icon should appear in the system tray at the  
bottom right of your screen (roll the cursor over the  
icons to find the correct one). If the FDU icon does not  
appear in the system tray, it can be started by going to  
[Start] -> All Programs, and clicking on Fujitsu Driver  
Update; this will create the icon automatically.  
6. If you have an external DVD drive connected:  
• Select the Advanced menu in the BIOS window.  
• Scroll down to the USB Features submenu and  
press the Enter key to open it.  
To invoke the FDU menu, you can either right-click on  
the FDU icon or hold the pen on the icon for a couple of  
seconds until the menu appears. The menu contains the  
following items:  
• If Legacy USB Support is disabled, press the space  
bar to enable it.  
• Scroll down to SCSI SubClass Support and press  
the space bar to enable it.  
Check for updates now  
7. Press [F10], then click on [Yes] to exit the BIOS  
Setup Utility and return to the boot process.  
Allows for manual driver update search. The first  
time it is used, you are prompted to agree to a user  
agreement. After clicking on the icon, the FDU auto-  
matically connects with the Fujitsu site to check for  
updates and downloads them. While downloading,  
the icon has a red bar through it, indicating that it  
cannot be used while the download is in process.  
When the update is complete, a message appears  
informing you of the fact.  
After you have changed the boot priority, you can restore  
a backup image when you are booting up.  
Procedure  
1. Turn on the power to your system.  
2. Ensure that you have a device that can read DVDs  
either installed in your system or attached exter-  
nally to it.  
Enable Automatic Update Notifications  
Automatically searches for new updates on a regular  
basis (approximately every 3 days).  
3. Insert the Restore DVD into the drive tray.  
4. Reboot your system.  
Show update history  
Brings up a screen that displays a history of updates  
that have been made via the FDU.  
5. After the system reboots, follow the instructions  
that appear to either restore your system image or  
erase all data from your hard disk.  
About Fujitsu Driver Update  
Displays the FDU version number and copyright  
information  
Fujitsu Driver Update Readme  
Displays the FDU readme.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 70 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 71 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
6
Care and Maintenance  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 72 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 73 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e  
If you accidentally spill liquid on your LifeBook note-  
book:  
Care and Maintenance  
1. Turn it off.  
If you use your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook carefully, you  
will increase its life and reliability. This section provides  
2. Position it so that the liquid can run out.  
3. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed.  
4. If your notebook will not boot after it has dried  
out, call your support representative.  
some tips for looking after the notebook and its devices.  
The system contains components that  
can be severely damaged by electro-  
static discharge (ESD). To minimize risk  
to the components, observe the  
following precautions:  
Do not use your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook in a wet  
environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool).  
Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are  
approved for your notebook.  
Before docking or undocking your  
LifeBook notebook (when using a port  
replicator), it is a good practice to  
always touch a grounded metal object  
to discharge static electricity built up  
in your body.  
Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental  
hazards.  
Do not expose your notebook to direct sunlight for long  
periods of time as temperatures above 140° F (60° C)  
may damage your notebook.  
Be sure to power down your system  
before adding or removing system  
components. Even if the system is in  
hibernate or standby states, data  
could be lost or memory could be  
damaged if power is still available to  
the system.  
Keep the covers closed on the connectors and slots  
when they are not in use.  
Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer.  
If you are carrying your LifeBook notebook in a brief-  
case, or any other carrying case, make sure that there are  
no objects in the case pressing on the lid.  
When installing or removing a  
memory module, hold it by the edge  
so as not to touch any contacts or  
chips. Be careful not to touch any  
internal computer terminals or compo-  
nents; the oil from your fingers could  
cause a short to the components.  
Never position your notebook such that the optical  
drive is supporting the weight of the notebook.  
Do not drop your notebook.  
Electrical equipment may be hazardous if  
Do not touch the screen with any sharp objects.  
misused. Operations of this product or  
similar products, must always be super-  
vised by an adult. Do not allow children  
access to the interior of any electrical  
products and do not permit them to  
handle any cables.  
Cleaning your LifeBook notebook  
Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not  
the cord.)  
Clean your LifeBook notebook with a damp, lint-free  
cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents.  
Caring for your LifeBook notebook  
Your LifeBook notebook is a durable but sensitive  
electronic device. Treat it with respect and care.  
Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never  
use glass cleaners.  
Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying  
Storing your LifeBook notebook  
If storing your notebook for a month or longer, turn  
your LifeBook notebook off, fully charge the battery(s),  
then remove and store all Lithium ion batteries.  
case. To protect your notebook from damage and to  
optimize system performance, be sure to keep all air  
all vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This  
may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the  
environment in which the system is used.  
Store your notebook and batteries separately. If you  
store your LifeBook with a battery installed, the battery  
will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addi-  
tion, a faulty battery might damage your LifeBook.  
Do not operate the notebook in areas where the air  
vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or  
on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion.  
Store your LifeBook in a cool, dry location. Tempera-  
Do not attempt to service the computer yourself.  
Always follow installation instructions closely.  
tures should remain between 13ºF (-25ºC) and 140ºF  
(60ºC).  
Keep it away from food and beverages.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 74 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Traveling with your LifeBook notebook  
Do not transport your notebook while it is turned on.  
BATTERIES  
Caring for your Batteries  
Always handle batteries carefully.  
It is recommended that you carry your notebook with  
you while traveling, rather than checking it in as bag-  
gage.  
Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do  
not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not  
carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may  
mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so  
may cause an explosion or fire.  
Always bring your System Recovery CD that came with  
your notebook when you travel. If you experience sys-  
tem software problems while traveling, you may need it  
to correct any problems.  
Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incin-  
erate the battery.  
Never put your notebook through a metal detector.  
Have your notebook hand-inspected by security per-  
sonnel. You can however, put your notebook through a  
properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems,  
place your notebook close to the entrance of the  
machine and remove it as soon as possible or have your  
notebook hand-inspected by security personnel. Secu-  
rity officials may require you to turn your notebook  
On. Make sure you have a charged battery on hand.  
Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and  
only in ventilated areas.  
Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a  
day or two. Intense heat can shorten battery life.  
Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6  
months without recharging it.  
Increasing Battery Life  
When traveling with the hard drive removed, wrap the  
Power your LifeBook notebook through the AC or  
drive in a non-conducting materials (cloth or paper). If  
you have the drive checked by hand, be ready to install  
the drive if needed. Never put your hard drive through a  
metal detector. Have your hard drive hand-inspected by  
security personnel. You can however, put your hard  
drive through a properly tuned X-ray machine.  
optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible.  
If your notebook is running on battery power all day,  
connect it to the AC adapter overnight to recharge the  
battery.  
Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable.  
Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling over-  
seas. Check the following diagram to determine which  
plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent.  
Set the power management for maximum battery life.  
Put your notebook in Standby mode when it is turned  
on and you are not actually using it.  
Outlet Type  
Location  
Limit your media drive access.  
Disable the Media Player auto insert notification  
function.  
United States, Canada,  
parts of Latin America,  
Mexico, Japan, Korea,  
the Philippines, Taiwan  
Always use fully charged batteries.  
Eject PCMCIATM cards when not in use.  
Russia and the Commonwealth  
of Independent States (CIS),  
most of Europe, parts of Latin  
America, the Middle East, parts  
of Africa, Hong Kong, India,  
most of South Asia  
FLOPPY DISKS AND DRIVES  
Caring for your Floppy Disks  
Avoid using the floppy disks in damp and dusty  
locations.  
Never store a floppy disk near a magnet or magnetic  
United Kingdom,  
Ireland, Malaysia, Singapore,  
parts of Africa  
field.  
Do not use a pencil or an eraser on a disk or disk label.  
Avoid storing the floppy disks in extremely hot or cold  
locations, or in locations subject to severe temperature  
China, Australia,  
New Zealand  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 75 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e  
changes. Store at temperatures between 50º F (10ºC)  
and 125ºF (52ºC).  
Caring for your Optical Drive  
Your optical drive is durable but you must treat it with  
care. Please pay attention to the following points:  
Do not touch the exposed part of the disk behind the  
metal shutter.  
The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed.  
Do not carry it around or subject it to shock  
or vibration with the power on.  
Never use the floppy disk drive with any liquid, metal,  
or other foreign matter inside the floppy disk drive  
or disk.  
Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed  
to extreme temperatures.  
Never disassemble your floppy disk drive.  
Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or  
dusty.  
MEDIA CARE  
Caring for your Media (DVD/CD/CD-R)  
Media discs are precision devices and will function reli-  
ably if given reasonable care.  
Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or  
devices that generate strong magnetic fields.  
Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be  
subjected to shock or vibration.  
Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in  
use.  
Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive.  
Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching  
the surface.  
Use of a commercially available lens cleaner is  
recommended for regular maintenance of your drive.  
Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures.  
Do not bend media discs or set heavy objects on them.  
PC CARDS/EXPRESSCARDS  
Caring for your PC Cards and ExpressCards  
PC Cards and ExpressCards are durable, but you must  
treat them with care. The documentation supplied with  
your card will provide specific information, but you  
should pay attention to the following points:  
Do not spill liquids on media discs.  
Do not scratch media discs.  
Do not get dust on media discs.  
Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or  
To keep out dust and dirt, store cards in their protective  
pencil. Always use a felt pen.  
sleeves when they are not installed in your LifeBook  
notebook.  
If a media disc is subjected to a sudden change in tem-  
perature, cold to warm condensation may form on the  
surface. Wipe the moisture off with a clean, soft, lint  
free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT  
use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs.  
Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or  
excessive heat.  
Keep the cards dry.  
If a disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it  
Do not flex or bend the cards, and do not place heavy  
with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner  
edge and wiping to the outer edge.  
objects on top of them.  
Do not force cards into the slot.  
Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting them to excessive  
vibration.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 76 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 77 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
7
Specifications  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 78 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 79 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
CONFIGURATION LABEL  
Specifications  
There is a configuration label located on the bottom of  
your LifeBook notebook. (See figure 2-8 on page 11 for  
location) This label contains specific information  
regarding the options you’ve chosen for your notebook.  
Following is an example label and information on how to  
read your own configuration label.  
This section provides the hardware and environmental  
specifications for your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook. Spec-  
ifications of particular configurations will vary.  
Configuration ID  
Part Number  
AU3XXXXXXXXXXXXX  
P/N:  
FPC P/N: FPCMXXXXX  
S7110, T1300, 14.1SXGA+, XPH, 80G, 512, LAN/WLAN  
Operating  
System  
Model #  
Processor  
Screen Size  
Hard Drive  
Memory  
Communications  
Figure 7-1 Configuration Label  
External: Up to 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution, 16M  
colors  
Simultaneous Video: Up to 1400 x 1050, 16M colors.  
XGA, SVGA and VGA compatible  
MICROPROCESSOR  
Intel® Core™ processors (Refer to the system label to  
determine the speed of your processor).  
CHIPSET  
Intel 945GM  
Video RAM  
Intel® Graphics Media Accelerator 950 with PCI-  
Express 16x interface; up to 128 MB shared video  
memory using Dynamic Video Memory Technology  
(DVMT).  
MEMORY  
System Memory  
DDR2 667 MHz dual-channel* SDRAM memory  
module. Two DIMM slots, one or both of which may be  
pre-populated with memory modules. Upgradeable to 2  
GB of total memory (1 GB x 2)  
AUDIO  
Realtek ALC262 codec with 2-channel High Definition  
(HD) audio  
* Dual-channel data transfer is enabled automatically only  
when using two DDR2 667 memory modules of the same  
capacity together.  
Stereo line-out/headphone jack, 3.5 mm, 1 V or  
less, minimum impedance 32 Ohms  
rms  
Stereo microphone/line-in jack, 3.5 mm, 100 mV or  
p-p  
less, minimum impedance 10K Ohms  
Two built-in stereo speakers, 16 mm diameter  
Cache Memory  
2 MB L2 on-die  
MASS STORAGE DEVICE OPTIONS  
Hard Drive  
100 GB, 80 GB, 60 GB, or 40 GB Serial ATA hard drive;  
5400 rpm, 1.5 Gb/s transfer rate  
VIDEO  
Built-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LCD display  
with simultaneous display capability  
Video Color and Resolution  
Depending upon your system configuration, you have  
one of the following displays:  
Media Player  
Depending upon the configuration of your system, one  
of the following is installed.  
14.1” Crystal View TFT XGA  
DVD-ROM Drive (8x DVD-R, 24 x CD-ROM), or,  
Combo DVD/CD-RW Drive (modular 8x  
Internal: Up to 1024 x 768 pixel resolution, 16M  
maximum DVD/24x maximum write, 10x  
maximum rewrite, 24x maximum read CD-RW  
combo drive), or,  
colors  
External: Up to 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution, 16M  
colors  
Simultaneous Video: Up to 1024 x 768, 16M colors.  
Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer (modular 8x  
DVD-R, 4x DVD-RW, 8x DVD+R, 4x DVD+RW,  
2.4x DL +R, 3x DVD-RAM, 8x DVD-ROM, 24x  
CD-R, 10x CD-RW, 24x CD-ROM)  
XGA, SVGA and VGA compatible  
14.1” TFT SXGA+  
Internal: Up to 1400 x 1050 pixel resolution, 16M  
colors  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 80 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Wireless LAN antenna with pre-installed on/off switch  
Optional Bluetooth module with antenna  
FEATURES  
Integrated Pointing Device  
On the Optional Port Replicator:  
Touchpad pointing device with scroll button  
Optional Quick Point cursor control button  
Optional fingerprint swipe sensor  
One 6-pin mini DIN PS/2 compatible connectors for  
external keyboard or mouse  
One 25-pin D-SUB connector for parallel input/  
output devices; Bi-directional, output only or ECP  
One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external video  
(see Display specifications)  
One 9-pin D-SUB connector for RS-232C serial  
input/output devices  
Four USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) connectors for  
input/output devices  
One LAN (RJ-45) connector  
One DC In connector  
One microphone In jack  
One headphone jack  
One Digital Video (DVI-D) 24-pin, female interface  
One power/suspend/resume button  
Communications  
Modem: Internal V.90 standard 56K fax/modem  
(ITU V.90, 56K data, 14.4K fax)  
Gigabit LAN: Internal wired 10Base-T/100Base-Tx/  
1000Base-T/Tx Ethernet LAN  
Wireless Devices:  
Optional integrated Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG  
Network Connections (802.11a/b/g*) with Antenna  
On/Off switch  
Optional Bluetooth device for wireless personal area  
network communication  
*
Operates at 2.4 GHz and 5.0 GHz; communications range may  
vary, depending upon environment.  
KEYBOARD  
Built-in keyboard with all functions of 101 key PS/2  
compatible keyboards.  
LifeBook Security/Application Panel  
The Application Launcher buttons on your LifeBook  
notebook default to the following applications:  
Total number of keys: 84  
Function keys: F1 through F12  
Feature extension key: Fn  
Two Windows keys: one Start key, one application key  
Key pitch: 19 mm  
Key stroke: 3 mm  
Built-in Touchpad pointing device with left and right  
Table 7-1 Application Launcher Defaults  
Button  
Label  
Button  
Function  
Default Application  
1
2
3
4
Application A  
Application B  
Internet  
Notepad  
buttons and scroll button.  
Built-in Palm Rest  
Optional Quick Point cursor control button  
Calculator  
Internet Explorer  
E-Mail  
Microsoft Outlook or  
Outlook Express  
External Keyboard Support  
USB or PS/2-compatible (PS/2 compatible with Port  
Replicator only)  
Theft Prevention Lock  
Lock slot for use with security restraint systems.  
External Mouse Support  
USB or PS/2-compatible (PS/2 compatible with Port  
Replicator only)  
DEVICE PORTS  
On the LifeBook notebook:  
PC Card slot for Type I or Type II card: PCMCIA  
Standard 2.1 with CardBus support  
POWER  
Batteries  
One 6-cell Lithium ion battery, rechargeable, 10.8V,  
5200 mAh, 56.16 Wh  
ExpressCard slot for one ExpressCard 54/34  
One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external video  
(see Display specifications)  
Three USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) connectors for  
input/output devices  
Optional Flexible Bay battery: 6-cell Lithium ion battery,  
rechargeable, 10.8V, 3800 mAh, 41.0 Wh  
One IEEE 1394 (4-pin type) jack  
One modular modem (RJ-11) connector  
One LAN (RJ-45) connector  
One stereo headphone/line-out jack.  
One stereo microphone/line-in jack.  
Embedded Smart Card Reader (requires optional  
third-party application and holder)  
S-Video Out jack  
AC Adapter  
Autosensing 100-240V AC, supplying 19V DC, 4.22A,  
80W to the LifeBook notebook, including an AC cable.  
Power Management  
Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power  
Interface).  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 81 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Manuals  
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT  
Overall Dimensions  
Included with your notebook you will find manuals for  
your installed operating system and other pre-installed  
software. Any manuals that are not included, are avail-  
able online through the help system of the software. We  
recommend that you review these manuals for general  
information on the use of these applications.  
Approximately 12.05"(w) x 9.72"(d) x 1.0”/1.3”(h)  
(306 mm x 247 mm x 25.4/33.0 mm)  
Weights  
Approximately 4.08 lbs (1.85 kg) with battery and  
weight saver.  
Approximately 4.52 lbs (2.05 kg) with battery and DVD/  
CD-RW Combo drive.  
Adobe Acrobat Reader  
The Adobe Acrobat Reader allows you to view, navigate,  
and print PDF files from across all of the major  
computing platforms.  
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS  
Temperature  
Operating: 41° to 95° F (5° to 35° C)  
Non-operating: 5° to 140° F (–15° to 60° C)  
Fujitsu HotKey  
Fujitsu HotKey allows you to control the display bright-  
ness of your notebook in order to maximize battery life.  
Humidity  
Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing  
Non-operating; 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing  
Quicken New User Edition  
Quicken New User Edition by Intuit is a personal money  
management program. It has features such as portfolio  
management, account registries, on-line banking and  
bill paying features. This application is for new users  
who are using Quicken software for the first time. Full  
version upgrade information is available on line.  
POPULAR ACCESSORIES  
For ordering or additional information on  
Fujitsu accessories please visit our Website at  
www.shopfujitsu.com or call 1-800-FUJITSU.  
PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE  
LifeBook Security/Application Panel Software  
Your LifeBook notebook is pre-installed with software  
utilities that let you operate and configure your LifeBook  
Security/Application Panel.  
Depending on your pre-installed operating system, your  
Fujitsu LifeBook notebook comes with pre-installed  
software for playing audio and video files of various  
formats. In addition there is file transfer software, virus  
protection software and Power Management software.  
The following list indicates the pre-installed software  
associated with your system.  
The Security Panel portion allows for password protection  
while the system is off or in Standby mode. The Security  
Panel utilities are found under the Start menu, under  
Programs, then under LifeBook Security Panel.  
Adobe Acrobat Reader  
Fujitsu HotKey/Fujitsu BatteryAid  
LifeBook Security/Application Panel  
Symantec Norton Internet Security 2006 (90-day free  
The Application Panel utilities are found under the Start  
menu, Settings/Control Panel, then Application Panel. To  
open the CD Player and Application Panel Help, select  
Start, Programs, LifeBook Application Panel.  
trial)  
Quicken New User Edition  
Fujitsu Driver Update Utility  
Norton Internet Security  
Your system is preinstalled with a free 90-day trial  
version of Symantec’s Norton™ Internet Security.  
Norton Internet Security includes Norton AntiVirus™,  
Norton Personal Firewall, Norton AntiSpam™, and  
Norton Parental Control. The suite of applications is  
designed to protect your LifeBook notebook from a  
variety of computer viruses, Trojan Horses, worms, and  
spyware. It assists in the protection of the data currently  
residing on your hard disk from destruction or contami-  
nation. The 90-day trial version is activated upon your  
acceptance of software license agreement. After 90 days,  
it will be necessary to purchase a subscription from  
Symantec to download latest virus definitions.  
Depending upon your system configuration, you may  
receive one of the following:  
Microsoft Works 8.5  
Microsoft Office 2003 Small Business Edition  
LEARNING ABOUT YOUR SOFTWARE  
Tutorials  
All operating systems and most application software  
have tutorials built into them upon installation. We  
highly recommend that you step through the tutorial  
before you use an application.  
(See your online help or manual for more information on  
how and when to run this program).  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 82 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 83 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
8
Glossary  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 84 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 85 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G l o s s a r y  
Boot  
Glossary  
To start-up a computer and load its operating system  
from disk, ROM or other storage media into RAM.  
AC Adapter  
A device which converts the AC voltage from a  
wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power  
your LifeBook notebook.  
Bus  
An electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU  
and the sub-assemblies inside your LifeBook notebook.  
ACPI  
Byte  
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface  
8 bits of parallel binary information.  
Active-Matrix Display  
Cache Memory  
A type of technology for making flat-panel displays  
which has a transistor or similar device for every pixel  
on the screen.  
A block of memory built into the micro-processor which  
is much faster to access than your system RAM and used  
in specially structured ways to make your overall data  
handling time faster.  
AdHoc  
A name of a wireless LAN configuration.  
CardBus  
A faster, 32-bit version of the PC Card interface which  
offers performance similar to the 32-bit PCI  
architecture.  
It is a type of communication using wireless cards only.  
Another type of communication is called Infrastructure  
(using a wireless card and an access point).  
CD-ROM  
ADSL  
Compact disk read only memory. This is a form of  
digital data storage which is read optically with a laser  
rather than a magnetic head. A typical CD-ROM can  
contain about 600MB of data and is not subject to heads  
crashing into the surface and destroying the data when  
there is a failure nor to wear from reading.  
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line  
Technology for transporting high bit-rate services over  
ordinary phone lines.  
AGP  
Accelerated Graphics Port  
Channel  
Graphics port specifically designed for graphics-inten-  
sive devices, such as video cards and 3D accelerators.  
A radio frequency band used for communication  
between wireless cards and access points.  
Auto/Airline Adapter  
CMOS RAM  
A device which converts the DC voltage from an auto-  
mobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC power outlet to  
the DC voltage needed to power your LifeBook note-  
book.  
Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random  
access memory. This is a technology for manufacturing  
random access memory which requires very low levels of  
power to operate.  
BIOS  
COM Port  
Basic Input-Output System. A program and set of  
default parameters stored in ROM which tests and  
operates your LifeBook notebook when you turn it on  
until it loads your installed operating system from disk.  
Information from the BIOS is transferred to the installed  
operating system to provide it with information on the  
configuration and status of the hardware.  
Abbreviation for communication port. This is your  
serial interface connection.  
Command  
An instruction which you give your operating system.  
Example: run a particular application or format a floppy  
disk.  
Bit  
Configuration  
The combination of hardware and software that makes  
An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of  
information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0).  
up your system and how it is allocated for use.  
bps  
CRT  
An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to describe  
Cathode Ray Tube. A display device which uses a beam  
data transfer rates.  
of electronic particles striking a luminescent screen. It  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 86 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
produces a visual image by varying the position and  
intensity of the beam.  
If you do not know the IP address but if you know the  
computer name, you can still communicate to that  
computer.  
Data  
The information a system stores and processes.  
DOS  
Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk  
DC  
Operating System).  
Direct current. A voltage or current that does not  
fluctuate periodically with time.  
Driver  
A computer program which converts application and  
operating system commands to external devices into the  
exact form required by a specific brand and model of  
device in order to produce the desired results from that  
particular equipment.  
Default Value  
A pre programmed value to be used if you fail to set your  
own.  
DHCP  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
DVMT  
Dynamic Video Memory Technology  
A protocol used to automatically acquire parameters  
required for the communication, such as IP address.  
A video memory architecture that increases the  
efficiency of the motherboard by using innovative  
memory utilization and direct AGP.  
The sender of IP address is called a DHCP server, and  
the receiver is called a DHCP client.  
ECP  
DIMM  
Extended Capability Port. A set of standards for high  
speed data communication and interconnection  
between electronic devices.  
Dual-in-line memory module.  
Disk  
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media. If the  
platter is very stiff it is a hard drive, if it is highly flexible  
it is a floppy disk, if it is a floppy disk in a hard housing  
with a shutter it is commonly called a diskette.  
Encryption Key (Network Key)  
Data encryption key used to encrypt message text and  
for computing message integrity checks. Data encryp-  
tion protects data from unauthorized viewing.  
Disk Drive  
This device uses the same encryption key to encode and  
decode the data, and the identical encryption key is  
required between the sender and receiver.  
The hardware which spins the disk and has the heads  
and control circuitry for reading and writing the data  
on the disk.  
ESD  
Diskette  
Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge of elec-  
tricity from a static charge which has built-up slowly.  
Example: the shock you get from a doorknob on a dry  
day or the sparks you get from brushing hair on a dry  
day.  
A floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter.  
DMA  
Direct Memory Access. Special circuitry for memory  
to memory transfers of data which do not require  
CPU action.  
Extended Memory  
All memory more than the 640KB recognized by  
MS-DOS as system memory.  
DMI  
Desktop Management Interface. A standard that  
provides PC management applications with a common  
method of locally or remotely querying and configuring  
PC computer systems, hardware and software compo-  
nents, and peripherals.  
FCC  
Federal Communication Commission.  
Floppy Disk  
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media which  
is highly flexible.  
DNS  
Domain Name System  
GB  
Gigabyte.  
A function to control the association between the IP  
address and the name assigned to the computer.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 87 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G l o s s a r y  
Hard drive  
replacing the system based on classes A, B, and C and is  
tied to adoption of IPv6. (credit: webopedia.com)  
A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media where  
the platter is very stiff.  
IR  
I/O  
An abbreviation for infrared.  
Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your notebook  
IrDA  
in electronic form.  
Infrared Data Association. An organization which  
produces standards for communication using infrared  
as the carrier.  
I/O Port  
The connector and associated control circuits for data  
entering and leaving your notebook in electronic form.  
IRQ  
IDE  
Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hardware signal  
to the CPU that an external event has occurred which  
needs to be processed.  
Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control interface  
for a hard drive which is inside the hard drive unit.  
Infrared  
KB  
Light just beyond the red portion of the visible light  
Kilobyte.  
spectrum which is invisible to humans.  
LAN  
Infrastructure  
Local Area Network. An interconnection of computers  
and peripherals within a single limited geographic  
location which can pass programs and data amongst  
themselves.  
A name of a wireless LAN configuration. This type of  
communication uses an access point.  
Another type of communication is called AdHoc.  
LCD  
IP Address  
Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which makes  
images by controlling the orientation of crystals in a  
crystalline liquid.  
An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP  
network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route  
messages based on the IP address of the destination. The  
format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address  
written as four numbers separated by periods. Each  
number can be zero to 255. For example, 1.160.10.240  
could be an IP address.  
Lithium ion Battery  
A type of rechargeable battery which has a high power-  
time life for its size and is not subject to the memory  
effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries.  
Within an isolated network, you can assign IP addresses  
at random as long as each one is unique. However,  
connecting a private network to the Internet requires  
using registered IP addresses (called Internet addresses)  
to avoid duplicates.  
LPT Port  
Line Printer Port. A way of referring to parallel interface  
ports because historically line printers were the first and  
latter the most common device connected to parallel  
ports.  
The four numbers in an IP address are used in different  
ways to identify a particular network and a host on that  
network. Three regional Internet registries -- ARIN,  
RIPE NCC and APNIC -- assign Internet addresses from  
the following three classes.  
MAC Address  
Media Access Control Address  
A unique physical address of a network card. For  
Ethernet, the first three bytes are used as the vendor  
code, controlled and assigned by IEEE. The remaining  
three bytes are controlled by each vendor (preventing  
overlap), therefore, every Ethernet card is given a unique  
physical address in the world, being assigned with a  
different address from other cards. For Ethernet, frames  
are sent and received based on this address.  
Class A - supports 16 million hosts on each of 126  
networks  
Class B - supports 65,000 hosts on each of 16,000  
networks  
Class C - supports 254 hosts on each of 2 million  
networks  
MB  
Megabyte.  
The number of unassigned Internet addresses is running  
out, so a new classless scheme called CIDR is gradually  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 88 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Megahertz  
Partition  
1,000,000 cycles per second.  
A block of space on a hard drive which is set aside and  
made to appear to the operating system as if it were a  
separate disk, and addressed by the operating system  
accordingly.  
Memory  
A repository for data and applications which is readily  
accessible to your LifeBook notebook’s CPU.  
PCI  
MHz  
Peripheral Component Interconnect  
Megahertz.  
Self-configuring PC local bus. Designed by Intel, PCI has  
gained wide acceptance as a standard bus design.  
MIDI  
Musical Instrument Digital Interface. A standard  
communication protocol for exchange of information  
between computers and sound producers such  
as synthesizers.  
PCMCIA  
PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer  
Memory Card International Association. The Personal  
Computer Memory Card International Association is an  
organization that sets standards for add-in cards for  
personal computers.  
Modem  
A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator. The  
equipment which connects a computer or other data  
terminal to a communication line.  
Peripheral Device  
A piece of equipment which performs a specific  
function associated with but not integral to a computer.  
Examples: a printer, a modem, a CD-ROM.  
Monaural  
A system using one channel to process sound from all  
sources.  
Pitch (keyboard)  
The distance between the centers of the letter keys of a  
keyboard.  
MPU-401  
A standard for MIDI interfaces and connectors.  
MTU  
Pixel  
The smallest element of a display, a dot of color on your  
display screen. The more pixels per area the clearer your  
image will appear.  
Maximum Transmission Unit  
The maximum data size that can be transferred at a time  
through the Internet or other networks. You can set a  
smaller MTU size to obtain successful communication,  
if you have difficulty transferring data due to the fact  
that the maximum size is too large.  
POST  
Power On Self Test. A program which is part of the BIOS  
which checks the configuration and operating condition  
of your hardware whenever power is applied to your  
notebook. Status and error messages may be displayed  
before the operating system is loaded. If the self test  
detects failures that are so serious that operation can not  
continue, the operating system will not be loaded.  
Norton AntiVirus  
Web-based software that protects you email, instant  
messages, and other files by removing viruses, worms,  
and Trojan horses.  
NTSC  
PPPoE  
National TV Standards Commission. The standard for  
TV broadcast and reception for the USA.  
Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet.  
A protocol for Ethernet, using a Point-to-Point Protocol  
(PPP), which is used for connection on the phone line.  
Operating System  
A group of control programs that convert application  
commands, including driver programs, into the exact  
form required by a specific brand and model of micro-  
processor in order to produce the desired results from  
that particular equipment.  
Program  
An integrated set of coded commands to your  
computers telling your hardware what to do and how  
and when to do it.  
Protocol  
Procedures and rules use to send and receive data  
between computers.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 89 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
G l o s s a r y  
- Method of sending and receiving data  
self-monitor. In those cases where SMART can give  
advance warning, a considerable amount of precious  
data can be saved.  
- Process used to handle communication errors  
Conditions required for communication are organized  
in procedures for correct transfer of information.  
SRAM  
Static random access memory. A specific technology of  
making RAM which does not require periodic data  
refreshing.  
RAM  
Random Access Memory. A hardware component of  
your LifeBook notebook that holds binary information  
(both program and data) as long as it has the proper  
power applied to it.  
SSID  
Service Set Identifier  
Specifies which network you are joining. Some systems  
allow you to specify any SSID as an option so you can  
join any network.  
RAM Module  
A printed circuit card with memory and associated  
circuitry which allows the user to add additional  
memory to the computer without special tools.  
Standby  
To make inoperative for a period of time. Your LifeBook  
notebook uses various suspension states to reduce power  
consumption and prolong the charge of your battery.  
Reset  
The act of reloading the operating system. A reset erases  
all information stored in RAM.  
Status Indicator  
Restart  
See Reset.  
A display which reports the condition of some portion  
of your hardware. On your LifeBook notebook this is an  
LCD screen just above the keyboard.  
Resume  
To proceed after interruption. In your notebook this  
refers to returning to active operation after having been  
in one of the suspension states.  
Stereo (audio)  
A system using two channels to process sound from two  
different sources.  
ROM  
SVGA  
Super VGA.  
Read Only Memory. A form of memory in which infor-  
mation is stored by physically altering the material. Data  
stored in this way can not be changed by your notebook  
and does not require power to maintain it.  
S-Video  
Super Video. A component video system for driving a  
TV or computer monitor.  
SDRAM  
Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory.  
System Clock  
An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which synchro-  
nizes the operation of the system and is counted to  
provide time of day and date.  
Serial Port  
A connection to another device through which data is  
transferred one bit at a time on a single wire with any  
other wires only for control of the device not for transfer  
of data.  
TCP/IP  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.  
A standard Internet protocol that is most widely used.  
SMART  
Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology  
(SMART) is an emerging technology that provides near-  
term failure predictions for hard drives. When SMART is  
enabled the hard drive monitors pre-determined drive  
attributes that are susceptible to degradation over time.  
If a failure is likely to occur, SMART makes a status  
report available so that the LifeBook notebook can  
prompt the user to back up the data on the drive. Natu-  
rally not all failures are predictable. SMART predict-  
ability is limited to those attributes which the drive can  
TFT  
Thin Film Transistor – A technology for flat display  
panels which uses a thin film matrix of transistors to  
control each pixel of the display screen individually.  
UL  
Underwriters Laboratories – An independent organiza-  
tion that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 90 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
USB  
Universal Serial Bus.  
Standard that allows you to simultaneously connect up  
to 127 USB devices such as game pads, pointing devices,  
printers, and keyboards to your computer.  
VGA  
Video Graphics Array. A video display standard  
originally introduced by IBM with the PS/2 series of  
personal computers.  
VRAM  
Video Random Access Memory. A memory dedicated to  
video display data and control.  
WFM  
Wired for Management is Intel’s broad-based initiative  
to reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) of business  
computing without sacrificing power and flexibility.  
Wi-Fi Compatible  
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) Identifies that the product has  
passed the interoperability test, supplied by the WECA  
(Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), which guar-  
antees the interoperability of wireless IEEE 802.11 LAN  
products. For more information on the Wi-Fi standard,  
go to the WECA Website at: www.wirelessethernet.com.  
WLAN  
Wireless Local Area Network. A wireless interconnection  
of computers and peripherals within a single limited  
geographic location which can pass programs and data  
amongst themselves.  
Write Protect  
Prevent alteration of the binary state of all bits in a  
storage media. Example: all information on a device  
such as a floppy diskette; a block of space in a storage  
media such as a partition of a hard drive; a file or direc-  
tory of floppy diskette or hard drive.  
XGA  
Extended VGA.  
Zip Drive  
A 100MB or 250MB read/write removable media disk  
drive.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 91 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
R e g u l a t o r y I n f o r m a t i o n  
The ringer equivalent number (REN) of this equipment  
is 0.1B as shown on the label. The REN is used to deter-  
mine the number of devices that may be connected to a  
telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone may  
result in the devices not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of  
RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the  
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as  
determined by the total RENs, contact the local tele-  
phone company.  
Regulatory Information  
NOTICE  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Fujitsu could void this user’s authority to operate the  
equipment.  
FCC NOTICES  
Notice to Users of Radios and Television  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-  
tion against harmful interference in a residential instal-  
lation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a partic-  
ular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can  
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network,  
the telephone company will notify you in advance that  
temporary discontinuance of service may be required.  
But if advance notice isn’t practical, the telephone  
company will notify the customer as soon as possible.  
Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint  
with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facili-  
ties, equipment, operations or procedures that could  
effect the operation of the equipment. If this happens  
the telephone company will provide advance notice in  
order for you to make necessary modifications to main-  
tain uninterrupted service.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair  
or warranty information, please refer to the manual or  
contact Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation,  
Customer Service. If the equipment is causing harm to  
the telephone network, the telephone company may  
request that you disconnect the equipment until the  
problem is resolved.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a  
different circuit than the receiver.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV  
technician for help.  
Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this  
equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF  
emission limits governing this device.  
The equipment cannot be used on public coin service  
provided by the telephone company. Connection to  
party line service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the  
state public utility commission, public service commis-  
sion or corporation commission for information).  
Notice to Users of the US Telephone Network  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules,  
and the requirements adopted by ACTA. On the bottom  
of this equipment is a label that contains, among other  
information, the FCC registration number and ringer  
equivalence number (REN) for this equipment; or a  
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.  
If requested, this information or number must be  
provided to the telephone company.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment  
connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation  
of this computer does not disable your alarm equip-  
ment. If you have any questions about what will disable  
alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a  
qualified installer.  
This equipment is designed to be connected to the tele-  
phone network or premises wiring using a standard jack  
type USOC RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this  
equipment to the premises wiring and telephone  
network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68  
rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A  
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided  
with this product. It is designed to be connected to a  
compatible modular jack that is also compliant.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes  
it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax  
machine unless such message clearly contains in a  
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or  
on the first page of the transmission, the date an time it  
is sent and an identification of the business or other  
entity, or other individual sending the message and the  
telephone number of the sending machine or such busi-  
ness, other entity, or individual.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 92 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES  
Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Réseau  
Notice to Users of Radios and Television  
Téléphonique Canadien  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of  
Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.  
AVIS: Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifica-  
tions techniques d’Industrie Canada applicables au  
matériel terminal. Cette conformité est confirmée par le  
numéro d’enregistrement. Le sigle IC, placé devant le  
numéro d’enregistrement, signifie que l’enregistrement  
s’est effectué conformément à une déclaration de  
conformité et indique que les spécifications techniques  
d’Industrie Canada ont été respectées. Il n’implique pas  
qu’Industrie Canada a approuvé le matériel.  
CET appareil numérique de la class B respecte toutes les  
exigence du Réglement sur le matérial brouilleur du  
Canada.  
Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone  
Network  
NOTICE: This equipment meets the applicable Industry  
Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications.  
This is confirmed by the registration number. The  
abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signi-  
fies that registration was performed based on a Declara-  
tion of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada  
technical specifications were met. It does not imply that  
Industry Canada approved the equipment.  
Avant de connecter cet équipement à une ligne télépho-  
nique, l’utilisateur doit vérifier s’il est permis de  
connecter cet équipement aux installations de télécom-  
munications locales. Lutilisateur est averti que même la  
conformité aux normes de certification ne peut dans  
certains cas empêcher la dégradation du service.  
Les réparations de l’équipement de télécommunications  
doivent être effectuées par un service de maintenance  
agréé au Canada. Toute réparation ou modification, qui  
n’est pas expressément approuvée par Fujitsu, ou toute  
défaillance de l’équipement peut entraîner la compagnie  
de télécommunications à exiger que l’utilisateur décon-  
necte l’équipement de la ligne téléphonique.  
Before connecting this equipment to a telephone line the  
user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this  
equipment to the local telecommunication facilities.  
The user should be aware that compliance with the  
certification standards does not prevent service  
degradation in some situations.  
Repairs to telecommunication equipment should be  
made by a Canadian authorized maintenance facility.  
Any repairs or alterations not expressly approved by  
Fujitsu or any equipment failures may give the telecom-  
munication company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment from the telephone line.  
AVIS: Lindice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du  
présent matériel est de 0.1B. LIES assigné à chaque  
dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de  
terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface  
téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut  
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs,  
à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équiva-  
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for  
this terminal equipment is 0.1B The REN assigned to  
each terminal equipment provides an indication of the  
maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected  
to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface  
may consist of any combination of devices subject only  
to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equiva-  
lence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.  
Pour assurer la sécurité, les utilisateurs  
doivent vérifier que la prise de terre du  
service d’électricité, les lignes télphoniques  
et les conduites d’eau métalliques sont  
connectées ensemble. Les utilisateurs NE  
doivent PAS tenter d’établir ces  
lence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five.  
connexions eux-mêmes, mais doivent  
contacter les services d’inspection  
d’installations électriques appropriés ou un  
électricien. Ceci peut être particulièrement  
important en régions rurales.  
For safety, users should ensure that the  
electrical ground of the power utility, the  
telephone lines and the metallic water  
pipes are connected together. Users  
should NOT attempt to make such  
connections themselves but should contact  
the appropriate electric inspection  
authority or electrician. This may be  
particularly important in rural areas.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 93 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Appendix A  
Integrated Wireless  
LAN* User’s Guide  
* Optional device  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 94 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 95 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e  
FCC Interference Statement  
FCC REGULATORY INFORMATION  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-  
tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with  
the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-  
ence will not occur in a particular installation.  
Please note the following regulatory information related to the  
wireless LAN device.  
Regulatory Notes and Statements  
Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use  
Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wire-  
less LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however,  
are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions  
from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN  
devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate  
within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards  
and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may  
be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
2. Increase the distance between the equipment and the  
receiver.  
On board an airplane, or  
In an explosive environment, or  
3. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different  
from the one the receiver is connected to.  
In situations where the interference risk to other devices or  
services is perceived or identified as harmful.  
4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician  
for help.  
In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN  
devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports,  
hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings),  
obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the  
equipment.  
FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement  
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits  
set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment  
should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of  
20 centimeters between the Wireless LAN antenna and your  
body. The WLAN antenna is located on the left and right ends  
of the top edge of the LCD screen.  
Regulatory Information/Disclaimers  
Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in  
strict accordance with the instructions included in the user  
documentation provided with the product. Any changes or  
modifications made to this device that are not expressly  
approved by the manufacturer may void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for  
any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized  
modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of  
connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by  
the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct  
any interference caused by such unauthorized modification,  
substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its autho-  
rized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any  
damage or violation of government regulations arising from  
failure to comply with these guidelines.  
The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or oper-  
ated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  
Export restrictions  
This product or software contains encryption code which may  
not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without  
an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This  
device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003  
B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesirable operation.  
Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu Computer  
Systems Corporation may invalidate the user's right to operate  
this equipment.  
This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction  
with any other antenna or transmitter.  
For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, the  
device is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of  
this device must be integral.  
Canadian Notice  
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device  
is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to  
provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit  
antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.  
Federal Communications Commission statement  
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must  
accept any interference, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation of this device.  
High power radars are allocated as the primary users of 5250-  
5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and these radars could cause  
interference and/or damage to LELAN (license-exempt LAN)  
devices operating in these bands.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 96 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k  
Before Using the Wireless LAN  
This manual describes the procedures required to prop-  
erly set up and configure the integrated Wireless LAN  
Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the  
rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read  
this manual carefully to ensure it's correct operation.  
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.  
WIRELESS LAN MODES  
Ad Hoc Mode  
(See Figure 5-1) "Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless  
network architecture where wireless network connec-  
tivity between multiple computers is established without  
a central wireless network device, typically known as  
Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using  
only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why  
Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer  
networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive  
method for establishing network connectivity between  
multiple computers.  
Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document  
This document is applicable to systems containing the  
Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG (WM3945ABG) Network  
Connections (802.11a+b/g)  
Characteristics of the WLAN Device  
The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the  
Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authenti-  
cation, and encryption key settings are identically  
configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network.  
main board of the mobile computer.  
The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands,  
eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating  
license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial,  
Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower,  
middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed  
National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands.  
Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode  
(See Figure 5-2) Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless  
network architecture in which devices communicate  
with wireless or wired network devices by communi-  
cating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode,  
wireless devices can communicate with each other or  
with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks  
operate in infrastructure mode because they require  
access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices,  
and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases).  
The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG WLAN device is  
capable of three operating modes, IEEE802.11a,  
IEEE802.11b and IEEE802.11g.  
The WLAN device is Wi-Fi certified and operates at  
the maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps in  
IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode and 11 Mbps in  
IEEE802.11b mode.  
How to Handle This Device  
The WLAN device supports the following encryption  
The WLAN device comes pre-installed in your mobile  
computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not  
be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The  
Operating System that your mobile computer comes  
with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN  
device.  
methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption.  
This device is compliant with the following standards:  
WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, and CCX3.0.  
The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG WLAN device sup-  
ports IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b and IEEE802.11g.  
Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 97 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e  
The WLAN device operates in the 2.4 GHz ISM band  
Deactivation using the Wireless On/Off Switch  
and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands.  
The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and effi-  
ciently by toggling the Wireless On/Off Switch to the Off  
position. (Figure 5-3)  
Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of  
WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz  
frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g devices. Interfer-  
ence by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a  
radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band.  
The Wireless On/Off switch has no effect on non-Wire-  
less LAN models.  
Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz fre-  
quency range may interfere with the operation of  
WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g modes. Symptoms of  
interference include reduced throughput, intermittent  
disconnects, and large amounts of frame errors. It is  
recommended that these interfering devices be pow-  
ered off to ensure the proper operation of the WLAN.  
WLAN Switch  
Figure A-3. Wireless LAN On/Off Switch  
Deactivation using Intel PROSet for Wireless Utility  
DEACTIVATING THE WLAN DEVICE  
The WLAN device can also be deactivated in Windows  
using the Intel PROSet for Wireless utility. The proce-  
dure to accomplish this:  
Deactivation of the WLAN device may be desired in  
certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where  
certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics,  
airplanes, etc.). Fujitsu mobile computers employ two  
methods with which to deactivate the WLAN device,  
1) the Wireless On/Off Switch, and, 2) in Windows  
using the Intel PROSet for Wireless utility.  
1. Click [Start]-> [All Programs].  
2. Select Intel ProSet Wireless, then click on Intel  
ProSet Wireless from the menu that appears. The  
Intel ProSet Wireless utility will be displayed.  
3. At the bottom left corner of the window, select  
Wireless Off from the dropdown list.  
Before using the wireless LAN device, you  
must first install ClickMe! to ensure that  
the correct software for your device is  
installed. (See Installing Click Me! on  
page 28 for more information)  
ACTIVATING THE WLAN DEVICE  
Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished  
using the same methods as the deactivation process.  
Using the Wireless On/Off Switch  
In Windows using Intel PROSet for Wireless  
Figure A-2. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network  
Wired LAN  
ADSL modem,  
Internet  
cable modem,  
or similar  
Access Point*  
Wireless LAN  
*An optional hub for a wired  
LAN may be required depending  
upon the type of access point used.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 98 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k  
Configuration of the WLAN Device  
The WLAN device can be configured to establish wire-  
less network connectivity using the Intel PROSet for  
Wireless utility. The Intel PROSet for Wireless utility  
allows for multiple profile setup and supports automatic  
profile switching. Support for most industry standard  
security solutions is contained in this software.  
4. Click the [Add] button. The General Settings dialog  
displays.  
5. Enter a profile name in the Profile Name field.  
6. Enter the network SSID, in the Network Name  
(SSID) field.  
7. Click Infrastructure or Ad Hoc for the operating  
mode.  
FLOW OF OPERATIONS  
1. Activate the WLAN Device (See Activating the  
8. Click [Advanced].  
WLAN Device on page 97 for more information).  
9. The Mandatory Access Point option is only used if  
Infrastructure mode is selected. Use this option to  
connect to a specific access point. Enter the MAC  
address for the access point. Click OK to save the  
setting and return to the General Settings page.  
2. Configure the Wireless Network parameters (See  
Configuration Using Intel PROSet for Wireless  
Utility, below).  
Enter the network name (SSID)  
10. Click [Next].  
Choose the appropriate WLAN architecture (Ad  
11. If you wish to enable Cisco Compatible Extensions,  
click Cisco Options and check the “Enable Cisco  
Compatible Extensions” box.  
Hoc or Infrastructure)  
Choose Authentication method: Open, Shared,  
WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, WPA-  
Personal, or WPA2-Personal.  
12. To enable LEAP support, check the 802.1x option  
and choose LEAP from the pull down list.  
If using static WEP keys, enter static WEP key and  
choose key index.  
13. Click [OK].  
14. Click Next.  
3. Configure network settings  
15. Select Open, Shared, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-  
Enterprise, WPA-Personal, or WPA2-Personal in  
the Network Authentication options.  
TCP/IP settings  
Workgroup or Domain settings.  
16. Select either None, WEP, CKIP, or TKIP for the  
data encryption.  
CONFIGURATION USING  
INTEL PROSET FOR WIRELESS UTILITY  
This section explains the procedure to properly  
configure the WLAN device using the Intel PROSet for  
Wireless utility. Pre-defined parameters will be required  
for this procedure. Please consult with your network  
administrator for these parameters:  
17. If WEP is selected, select either 64 or 128-bit for the  
Encryption Level.  
18. Select the appropriate key index for your WLAN.  
The key index must be identical to the WEP key  
index used by the Access Point.  
19. Enter the WEP key if required. If your network  
does not employ a 802.1x/EAP security mecha-  
nism, please skip to step 24.  
Network Name - Also known as the SSID  
Network Key (WEP) - Required if using static WEP  
keys.  
20. Click the Enable 802.1x checkbox to enable the  
802.1x security option. Please contact your network  
administrator if configuration of this setting is  
required.  
Authentication Type - Open, Shared, WPA, WPA-PSK  
Procedure  
1. Activate the WLAN device using either the Wire-  
less On/Off Switch or the Intel PROSet for Wireless  
utility.  
21. Select the appropriate Authentication Type. Please  
contact your network administrator if configura-  
tion of this setting is required.  
2. Click the [Start] button first and then [All Pro-  
grams].  
22. After selecting authentication type, enter the name,  
domain, and password of the user you have created  
on the authentication server. The user name and  
password do not have to be the same as name and  
password of your current Windows user login.  
3. Click the icon [Intel PROSet Wireless] to execute  
the Intel PROSet for Wireless utility.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 99 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e  
23. Click [OK] to save the settings.  
static IP addresses, consult with your network  
administrator for the correct IP address settings.  
24. From the Intel ProSet Wireless page, click the new  
profile name shown in the Profile List. Use the up  
and down arrows to position the priority of the  
new profile in the priority list.  
8. Click the [OK] button. Processing will return to the  
[Wireless Network Connection Properties] window.  
9. Click the [OK] button.  
25. Click the Connect button to connect to the net-  
work.  
10. Close the [Network Connection] window.  
Following this operation, confirm the names of the  
computer and the workgroup as follows.  
Click [Close] if you want to close the Intel(R) PROSet  
for Wireless window.  
Confirming the computer and work group names  
CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK  
This section explains connection to the network.  
To modify the computer name and/or the  
work group name, you need to be logged  
in from Windows as an administrator.  
If there is an administrator of the network, contact the  
network administrator for data settings.  
Setting the network  
1. Click the [Start] button, then [Control Panel].  
Perform the “Setting TCP/IP” and “Confirming the  
computer and work group names” operations required for  
network connection.  
2. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to  
Classic view by clicking “Switch to Classic View”  
under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are  
already in Classic view, “Switch to Category View”  
will be displayed.)  
Setting TCP/IP  
To change the setting of the IP address,  
you need to be logged in from Windows  
as an administrator.  
3. Double-click the [System] icon. The [System Prop-  
erties] window will be displayed.  
4. Click the [Computer Name] tab.  
5. Confirm the settings of [Full computer name:] and  
[Workgroup:].  
1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Control  
Panel].  
a. The setting of [Full computer name:] denotes the  
name for identifying the computer. Any name  
can be assigned for each personal computer.  
2. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to  
Classic view by clicking “Switch to Classic View”  
under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are  
already in Classic view, “Switch to Category View”  
will be displayed.)  
To change the name, click [Change], then  
proceed in accordance with the instruction  
messages displayed on the screen.  
3. Double-click [Network Connections]. A list of cur-  
rently installed networks will be displayed.  
4. Right-click [Wireless Network Connection] in the  
list, and then click [Properties] in the menu dis-  
played. The [Wireless Network Connection Prop-  
erties] window will be displayed.  
Enter the desired name in less than 15 ASCII  
character code format. Identifiability can be  
enhanced by entering the model number, the  
user name, and other factors.  
5. Click the [General] tab if it is not already selected.  
b. [Workgroup name] is the group name of the  
network. Enter the desired name in less than 15  
ASCII character code format.  
6. Click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP] and then click  
[Properties]. The [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)  
Properties] window will be displayed.  
For ad hoc connection: Assign the same network  
name to all personal computers existing on the  
network.  
7. Set the IP address as follows:  
For ad hoc connection: Select [Use the following  
IP address:] and then enter data for [IP address]  
and [Subnet mask]. See page 105 for IP address  
setting.  
For access point (infrastructure) connection:  
Assign the name of the work group to be accessed.  
6. Click the [OK] button. If a message is displayed  
that requests you to restart the personal computer,  
click [Yes] to restart the computer.  
For access point (infrastructure) connection: If  
your network uses DHCP, select [Obtain an IP  
address automatically] and [Obtain DNS server  
address automatically]. If your network uses  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 100 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k  
Setting the sharing function  
2. Double-click [Local disk (C:)].  
Set the sharing function to make file and/or printer sharing  
with other network-connected personal computers valid.  
3. Right-click the “work” folder (or whichever folder  
you want to share), and then click [Sharing and  
Security...] in the menu displayed. The [Folder  
Name Properties] window will be displayed.  
This operation is not required unless the sharing func-  
tion is to be used.  
The folder and printer for which the sharing function  
has been set will be usable from any personal computer  
present on the network.  
Setting file-sharing functions for a file  
which has been used to execute Network  
Setup Wizard is suggested on the screen.  
For the wireless LAN, however, since  
security is guaranteed by entry of the  
network name (SSID) and the network  
key, the steps to be taken to set the file-  
sharing function easily without using  
Network Setup Wizard are given below.  
To share a file and/or the connected  
printer, you need to be logged in as an  
administrator.  
Setting the Microsoft network-sharing service  
1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Control  
Panel].  
4. Click [Sharing] if it isn’t already selected.  
5. Click the link stating “If you understand the secu-  
rity risks, but want to share files without running  
the wizard, click here.  
2. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to  
Classic view by clicking “Switch to Classic View”  
under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are  
already in Classic view, “Switch to Category View”  
will be displayed.)  
6. Click “Just enable file sharing” and click [OK].  
7. Check the [Share this folder on the network] box.  
3. Double-click [Network Connections]. A list of cur-  
rently installed networks will be displayed.  
To specify the corresponding folder as a  
read-only folder, select the [Read only]  
checkbox under the General tab.  
4. Right-click [Wireless Network Connection] in the  
list, and then click [Properties] in the menu dis-  
played. The [Wireless Network Connection Prop-  
erties] window will be displayed.  
8. Click the [OK] button. The folder will be set as a  
sharable folder, and the display of the icon for the  
“work.folder will change.  
5. If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Net-  
works] is displayed, proceed to step 6. If [File and  
Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not dis-  
played, skip to step 7.  
Setting the printer-sharing function  
1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Printers and  
FAX]. A list of connected printers will be displayed.  
6. Make sure that the [File and Printer Sharing for  
Microsoft Networks] check box is checked, and  
then click the [OK] button. Skip to “Setting file-  
sharing function.  
2. Right-click the printer for which the sharing func-  
tion is to be set, and then click [Sharing] in the  
menu displayed. The property window correspond-  
ing to the selected printer will be displayed.  
7. Click [Install]. The [Select Network Component  
Type] window will be displayed.  
Setting the printer-sharing function when  
Network Setup Wizard has been executed  
is suggested on the screen. For the wireless  
LAN, however, since security is guaranteed  
by entry of the network name (SSID) and  
network key, the steps to be taken to set  
the printer-sharing function without using  
Network Setup Wizard are listed below.  
8. Click [Service], then click the [Add] button. The  
[Select Network Service] window will be displayed.  
9. Click [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Net-  
works] and then click the [OK] button. Processing  
will return to the [Wireless Network Connection  
Properties] window, and [File and Printer Sharing  
for Microsoft Networks] will be added to the list.  
3. Click the [Sharing] tab.  
10. Click the [Close] button.  
4. Click [Share this printer].  
Setting the file-sharing function  
The procedure for setting file-sharing functions follows,  
with the “work” folder in drive C: as an example.  
5. Enter the sharing printer name in [Share name].  
6. Click the [OK] button.  
1. Click the [Start] button, then [My Computer].  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 101 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e  
Confirming connection  
Signal Strength  
Displays a graphic representation of the current  
signal strength.  
After you have finished the network setup operations,  
access the folder whose sharing has been set for other  
personal computers. Also, confirm the status of the  
radio waves in case of trouble such as a network connec-  
tion failure.  
Additionally, in the lower section of the display, you  
will see a variety of different measurements related  
to the WLAN. For additional information about the  
items, click on the “Help?” button:  
In the case of access point (infrastructure)  
connection, enter the necessary data for  
the access point before confirming  
connection. Refer to the manual of the  
access point for the access point setup  
procedure.  
Adapter MAC Address  
Band  
Supported Data Rates  
Radio Frequency  
Channel Number  
Connecting your personal computer to another  
personal computer  
Network Authentication  
Data Encryption  
1. Click [Start] first and then [My Computer]. The  
[My Computer] window will be displayed in the  
left frame.  
802.1x Authentication Type  
802.1x Authentication Protocol  
CCX Version  
2. Click [My Network Places] in the “Other Places”  
list. The window [My Network Places] will be dis-  
played.  
CCX TPC  
3. Click [View workgroup computers] under Net-  
work Tasks in the left frame.  
CCX Power Levels  
Access Point MAC Address  
Mandatory Access Point  
4. Double-click the personal computer to which your  
personal computer is to be connected. The folder  
that was specified in “Setting the file-sharing func-  
tion” on page 100 will be displayed.  
5. Double-click the folder to be accessed.  
Confirming the status of the radio  
1. Right-click the Intel PRO Wireless icon in the  
lower right corner of the screen.  
2. Click [Open Intel PROSet for Wireless]. The Intel  
PROSet for Wireless window opens.  
3. Contained within the General tab and the Details  
section (accessed by pressing the [Details] button),  
you will find the current operating status of the  
radio. (When the radio is turned off or the com-  
puter is not yet connected, some of the conditions  
will not be displayed.)  
Profile Name  
The current configuration profile is displayed.  
Network Name (SSID)  
Displays the Network Name (SSID) currently  
used by the radio.  
IP Address  
The IP address of the current profile.  
Signal Quality  
Displays a message stating the current quality of  
the signal.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 102 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k  
Troubleshooting the WLAN  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the  
following table.  
Problem  
Possible Cause  
Possible Solution  
Incorrect network  
name (SSID) or  
network key  
Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSID’s) and network  
keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured  
correctly. SSID’s and WEP key values must be identical on each machine.  
Unavailable  
network  
connection  
Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set the network name (SSID)  
and network key to the same values as those of the access point.  
Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access  
Point (See Configuration Using Intel PROSet for Wireless Utility on  
page 98 for more information). Please consult your network adminis-  
trator for this value, if necessary.  
Weak received signal  
strength and/or link  
quality  
Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to  
the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight.  
Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after short-  
ening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for  
better sight.  
To check the wave condition, refer to the following page: “Confirming  
the status of the radio waves” on page 101.  
The WLAN device  
has been deactivated  
or disabled  
Check if the wireless switch is turned ON. Also verify “Disable Radio” is  
not checked in “Network setting” window.  
The computer to be  
connected is turned  
off  
Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON.  
RF interference from  
Access Points or  
other wireless  
networks  
The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference  
with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your  
Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering  
device.  
Wireless network  
authentication has  
failed  
Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security  
settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly  
typed WEP key, a mis-configured LEAP username, or an incorrectly  
chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate  
but not authenticate to the wireless network.  
Incorrectly  
Recheck the configuration of your network settings.  
configured network  
settings  
For the method of checking, refer to the following page:·“Connection to  
the Network” on page 99.  
Incorrect IP address  
configuration  
This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact  
your network administrator for the correct settings.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 103 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e  
Wireless LAN Glossary  
MAC address (Media Access Control Address)  
GLOSSARY  
Access point  
A MAC address (also called an Ethernet address or IEEE  
MAC address) is the 48-bit address (typically written as  
twelve hexadecimal digits, 0 through 9 and A through F,  
or as six hexadecimal numbers separated by periods or  
colons, e.g., 0080002012ef, 0:80:0:2:20:ef) which identify  
uniquely a computer that has an Ethernet interface.  
Wireless network device used to bridge wireless and  
wired network traffic.  
Ad Hoc Mode  
Ad Hoc Mode refers to a wireless network architecture  
where wireless network connectivity between multiple  
computers is established without a central wireless  
network device, typically known as Access Points.  
Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices  
in a peer-to-peer fashion. For details, refer to Ad hoc  
connection” on page 96.  
MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit)  
The maximum size of data which can be transmitted at  
one time in networks including the Internet. In an envi-  
ronment whose maximum size of data is too large to  
correctly receive data, normal communications can be  
restored by setting the size of MTU to a smaller value.  
Channel  
Network key  
Range of narrow-band frequencies used by the WLAN  
device to transmit data. IEEE802.11b/g - 11 channels, 22  
MHz wide channels.  
Data that is used for encrypting data in data communi-  
cation. The personal computer uses the same network  
key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore,  
it is necessary to set the same network key as the other  
side of communication.  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)  
A protocol that provides a means to dynamically allocate  
IP addresses to computers on a local area network.  
Network name (SSID: Service Set Identifier)  
When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is  
performed to avoid interference or data theft. This  
grouping is performed with “Network name (SSID). In  
order to improve security, the network key is set  
allowing no communication unless “Network name  
(SSID)” coincides with the network key.  
DNS (Domain Name System)  
A data query service that provides a mechanism with  
which to translate host names into Internet addresses.  
IEEE802.11a  
Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data  
rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11a devices operate in the 5 GHz  
lower and middle UNII bands.  
Open system authentication  
Null authentication method specified in the 802.11 stan-  
dard that performs no authentication checks on a wire-  
less client before allowing it to associate.  
IEEE802.11b  
Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data  
rate of 11 Mbps. 802.11b devices operate in the 2.4 GHz  
ISM band.  
PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet)  
A method of allowing the authentication protocol  
adopted in telephone line connection (PPP) to be used  
over an Ethernet.  
IEEE802.11g  
Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data  
rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11g devices operate in the 2.4 GHz  
ISM band.  
Protocol  
A procedure or rule of delivering data among  
computers. Ordered data communication is allowed by  
making all conditions required for communication  
including the method of data transmission/reception  
and action upon communication errors into procedures.  
IP address  
The logical 32-bit host address defined by the Internet  
Protocol that uniquely identifies a computer on a  
network. The IP address is usually expressed in dotted  
decimal notation.  
Shared key authentication  
802.11 network authentication method in which the AP  
sends the client device a challenge text packet that the  
client must then encrypt with the correct WEP key and  
return to the AP. If the client has the wrong key or no  
key, authentication will fail and the client will not be  
allowed to associate with the AP. Shared key authentica-  
LAN (Local Area Network)  
A LAN or Local Area Network is a computer network  
(or data communications network) which is confined to  
a limited geographical area.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 104 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k  
tion is not considered secure, because a hacker who  
detects both the clear-text challenge and the same chal-  
lenge encrypted with a WEP key can decipher the key.  
SSID (Service Set Identifier)  
Service Set Identifier, a 32-character unique identifier  
attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that  
acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect  
to the BSS. The SSID differentiates one WLAN from  
another, so all access points and all devices attempting to  
connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. A  
device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can  
provide the unique SSID. Because the SSID is broadcast  
in plain text, it does not supply any security to the  
network.  
Subnet mask  
TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into  
multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists  
of the subnet address and the address of each computer.  
Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address  
comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set  
among computers communicating with each other.  
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet  
Protocol)  
A standard protocol of the Internet.  
Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a set of standards for wireless  
local area networks (WLAN) based on the IEEE 802.11  
specifications. Certified products can use the official Wi-  
Fi logo, which indicates that the product is interoperable  
with any other product also showing that logo.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 105 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e  
IP address information  
ABOUT IP ADDRESSES  
IP addressing is much more complicated  
than can be briefly explained in this  
document. You are advised to consult with  
your network administrator for additional  
information.  
If IP address is unknown, set IP address as follows:  
If you have an access point (DHCP server) on the  
network, set the IP address as follows:  
[Obtain an IP address automatically]  
A DHCP server is a server that  
automatically assigns IP addresses to  
computers or other devices in the network.  
There is no DHCP server for the AdHoc  
network.  
If the IP address is already assigned to the computer in  
the network, ask the network administrator to check the  
IP address to be set for the computer.  
If no access point is found in the network:  
An IP address is expressed with four values in the range  
between 1 and 255.  
Set the each computer as follows: The value in paren-  
theses is a subnet mask.  
<Example>  
Computer A: 192.168.100.2 (255.255.255.0)  
Computer B: 192.168.100.3 (255.255.255.0)  
Computer C: 192.168.100.4 (255.255.255.0)  
:
:
Computer X: 192.168.100.254 (255.255.255.0)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 106 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k  
WLAN Specifications  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Specification  
Type of network  
The Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG (WM3945ABG) Network  
Connections WLAN device conforms to IEEE 802.11a and  
802.11b/g (Wi-Fi based)*.  
Transfer rate  
(Automatic switching) 54 Mbps maximum data rate  
Active frequency  
802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz  
802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz  
Number of channels  
802.11a: 8 independent channels  
802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels  
Typical operating distances**  
802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps  
802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps  
802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps  
Security  
Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***  
WPA 1.0 compliant  
Encryption Key lengths Supported: 64 bits and 128 bits  
802.1x/EAP  
Maximum recommended number of computers  
to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc  
connection)  
10 units or less ****  
*
“Wi-Fi based” indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of  
wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.  
** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls,  
reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.  
*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/  
104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.  
**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 107 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e  
Using the Bluetooth Device  
The Integrated Bluetooth module (UGXZ5-102A) is an  
optional device available for Fujitsu mobile computers.  
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement  
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure  
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The  
Bluetooth antenna is located on the right hinge of the  
LCD screen and is exempt from minimum distance  
criteria due to its low power.  
WHAT IS BLUETOOTH  
Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wire-  
less link between mobile devices, such as laptop  
computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth  
technology is used to create Personal Area Networks  
(PANs) between devices in short-range of each other.  
The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or  
operated in conjunction with any other antenna or  
transmitter.  
The Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off  
Switch will power off both the optional  
wireless LAN and Bluetooth devices at the  
same time. To enable or disable either one  
of the devices individually, perform the  
following steps:  
Canadian Notice  
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this  
device is intended to be operated indoors and away from  
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or  
its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject  
to licensing.  
1. Slide the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth on/  
off switch to On position.  
Warranty  
2. In the Control Panel, double-click the  
Fujitsu Radio Control icon.  
Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any  
modifications invalidate the warranty.  
3. In the window that appears, click the  
button associated with Bluetooth and/  
or Wireless LAN Status to enable or dis-  
able the individual devices.  
This equipment may not be modified, altered, or  
changed in any way without signed written permission  
from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the  
equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry  
Canada and the warranty.  
4. Click [OK].  
WHERE TO FIND INFORMATION  
ABOUT BLUETOOTH  
The Bluetooth module contains a robust Help user’s  
guide to assist you in learning about operation of the  
Bluetooth device.  
To access the Help file, click [Start] -> All Programs,  
and click on Toshiba. Select Bluetooth, then select User’s  
Guide.  
For additional information about Bluetooth Tech-  
nology, visit the Bluetooth Website at: www.blue-  
tooth.com.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 108 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 109 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Appendix B  
Using the  
Fingerprint Sensor*  
* Optional Device  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 110 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 111 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r  
GETTING STARTED  
Fingerprint Sensor Device  
This section guides you through the preparation of your  
system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition  
application. You will be led through the OmniPass  
installation process. You will also be led through the  
procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass.  
INTRODUCING THE OPTIONAL  
FINGERPRINT SENSOR DEVICE  
Your system may have an optional fingerprint sensor  
device in the location at which other models have a  
scroll button. (Figure B-1)  
INSTALLING OMNIPASS  
If OmniPass has already been installed on your system,  
skip this section and go directly to “User Enrollment” on  
page 112. You can determine whether OmniPass has  
already been installed by checking to see if the following  
are present:  
The presence of the gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in  
the system tray at the bottom right of the screen.  
The presence of the Softex program group in the  
Programs group of the Start menu  
System Requirements  
Figure B-1 Fingerprint sensor  
The OmniPass application requires space on your hard  
drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems (OS’s).  
The minimum requirements are as follows:  
Although the system may have a  
fingerprint sensor in place of a scroll  
button, the fingerprint sensor can be used  
for scrolling. Simply move your fingerprint  
over the sensor the same as you would use  
a scroll button.  
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Profes-  
sional operating system  
At least 35 MB available hard disk space  
Installing the OmniPass Application  
If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to  
“User Enrollment” on page 112. Otherwise continue  
with this section on software installation.  
With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter  
a username and password every time you want to:  
Log onto Windows  
For installation, OmniPass requires that the  
user installing OmniPass have  
administrative privileges to the system. If  
your current user does not have  
administrative privileges, log out and then  
log in with an administrator user before  
proceeding with OmniPass installation.  
Recover from standby mode  
Cancel a password-protected screen saver  
Log into homepages that require a username and pass-  
word  
After you have “enrolled” - or registered - your finger-  
print, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the  
sensor for the system recognize you.  
To install OmniPass on your system you must:  
The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which  
provides password management capabilities to  
Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass  
enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows,  
applications, and on-line passwords.  
1. Insert the installation media for the OmniPass appli-  
cation into the appropriate drive. If you are  
installing from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you must  
find and launch the OmniPass installation program  
(setup.exe) from the media.  
OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves  
using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the  
Windows desktop. This device results in a secure  
authentication system for restricting access to your  
computer, applications, websites, and other password-  
protected resources.  
2. Follow the directions provided in the OmniPass  
installation program. Specify a location to which  
you would like OmniPass installed. It is recom-  
mended that you NOT install OmniPass in the root  
directory (e.g. C:\).  
3. Once OmniPass has completed installation you will  
be prompted to restart you system. Once your  
system has rebooted you will be able to use  
OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately  
after installation, OmniPass will not be available for  
use until the next reboot.  
OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface,  
through which you can securely manage passwords,  
users, and multiple identities for each user.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 112 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
The installation program automatically places an icon  
(Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well  
as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar.  
network resources, you often have to supply credentials  
to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of creden-  
tials that you have to remember.  
Verifying Information about OmniPass  
After you have completed installing OmniPass and  
restarted your system, you may wish to check the version  
of OmniPass on your system.  
During OmniPass user enrollment a "master password”  
is created for the enrolled user. This master password  
“replaces” all other passwords for sites you register with  
OmniPass.  
To check the version information of OmniPass:  
Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system  
(his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with  
username “John_01” and password “freq14. He then  
goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He  
inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username  
“John_02” and password “lifebook”), but instead of  
clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember  
Password. Now whenever he returns to that site,  
OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials.  
1. From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-  
shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually  
located in the lower right corner of the screen),  
or,  
Click the Start button, select Settings, and click  
Control Panel (if you are using Windows XP you  
will see the Control Panel directly in the Start menu;  
click it, then click Switch to Classic View). Double-  
click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the  
OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not  
appear, then the program is not properly installed,  
or,  
John enters his OmniPass user credentials (“John_01”  
and “freq14”) in the OmniPass authentication prompt,  
and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do  
this with as many websites or password protected  
resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those  
sites with his OmniPass user credentials (“John_01” and  
“freq14”). This is assuming he is accessing those sites  
with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass  
user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials  
of the password protected resource. If John were to go to  
an Internet cafe to access his webmail, he would need to  
enter his original webmail credentials (“John_02” and  
“lifebook”) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass  
user credentials on a system other than where he  
Click the Start button, select Programs, and from  
the submenu select the Softex program group, from  
that submenu click OmniPass Control Center.  
2. Select the About tab at the top of the OmniPass  
Control Panel. The About tab window appears with  
version information about OmniPass.  
Uninstalling OmniPass  
For uninstallation, OmniPass requires that  
the user uninstalling OmniPass have  
administrative privileges to the system. If  
your current user does not have  
administrative privileges, log out and then  
log in with an administrator user before  
proceeding with OmniPass uninstallation.  
enrolled that OmniPass user, he will not gain access.  
The enrollment procedure assumes you  
have no hardware authentication devices  
or alternate storage locations that you  
wish to integrate with OmniPass. If you  
desire such functionality, consult the  
appropriate sections of this document.  
To remove the OmniPass application from your system:  
1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Settings,  
and then Control Panel.  
Basic Enrollment  
The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the  
process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified other-  
wise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard  
will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the  
Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start  
on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex;  
click OmniPass Enrollment Wizard.  
2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.  
3. Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove.  
4. Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass  
application.  
5. Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot  
your system when prompted.  
1. Click Enroll to proceed to username and password  
verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment  
Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged  
in Windows user.  
USER ENROLLMENT  
Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first  
enroll a user into OmniPass.  
Master Password Concept  
2. Enter the password you use to log in to Windows.  
This will become the “master password” for this  
OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value  
Computer resources are often protected with passwords.  
Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing  
your email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 113 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r  
will be your Windows computer name. In a corpo-  
rate environment, or when accessing corporate  
resources, the Domain: may not be your Windows  
computer name. Click [Next] to continue.  
3. Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the finger-  
print, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automati-  
cally appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint,  
place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there  
as if you were having a fingerprint captured.  
3. In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint.  
Refer to “Enrolling a Fingerprint” on page 113 for  
additional information.  
Successful fingerprint verification will show a green  
fingerprint in the capture window and the text Veri-  
fication Successful under the capture window.  
4. Next, choose how OmniPass notifies you of various  
events. We recommend you keep Taskbar Tips on  
Beginner mode taskbar tips and Audio Tips on at  
least Prompt with system beeps only until you get  
accustomed to how OmniPass operates. Click [Next]  
to proceed with user enrollment. You will then see a  
Congratulations screen indicating your completion  
of user enrollment.  
USING OMNIPASS  
You are now ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regu-  
larly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications.  
Password Replacement  
You will often use the password replacement function.  
When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your  
bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment  
sites), you are always prompted to enter your login  
credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you  
can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next  
time you go to that website, you can authenticate with  
your fingerprint to gain access.  
5. Click [Done] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment  
Wizard. You will be asked if you’d like to log in to  
OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes].  
Enrolling a Fingerprint  
Enrolling a fingerprint will increase the security of your  
system and streamline the authentication procedure.  
OmniPass Authentication Toolbar  
You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center.  
With an OmniPass user logged in, double-click the  
system tray OmniPass icon. Select the User Settings tab  
and click Enrollment under the User Settings area. Click  
Enroll Authentication Device and authenticate at the  
authentication prompt to start device enrollment.  
After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice  
a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon.  
This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is  
displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system  
is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be  
invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during  
OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation,  
when resuming from standby or hibernate, when  
unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during pass-  
word replacement for remembered site or application  
logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass  
is prompting you to authenticate.  
1. During initial user enrollment, you will be  
prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll.  
Fingers that have already been enrolled will be  
marked by a green check. The finger you select to  
enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow.  
OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you  
choose a finger that has already been enrolled and  
continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the  
fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a  
finger to enroll and click [Next].  
The Logon Authentication window indicates what  
OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The  
icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what  
authentication methods are available to you. Selected  
authentication methods are highlighted while unselected  
methods are not. When you click the icon for an unse-  
lected authentication method, the authentication  
prompt associated with that method is displayed.  
2. It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected  
fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts  
before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should  
OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the  
capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the  
fingerprint enrollment process.  
When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the  
appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the finger-  
print capture window or your master password for the  
master password prompt (the key icon).  
Your system has a “swipe” fingerprint sensor. A  
swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elon-  
gated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently  
swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting  
at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping  
too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture.  
The Choose Finger screen has a [Practice] button;  
click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When  
you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is  
captured, proceed to enroll a finger.  
Remembering a Password  
OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or pass-  
word protected resource that has a password prompt.  
Using the following procedure, you can store a set of  
credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be  
linked to your “master password” or fingerprint.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 114 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Go to a site that requires a login (username and pass-  
word), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt,  
enter your username and password in the prompted  
fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter],  
[Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass  
system tray icon and select Remember Password from  
the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to  
a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click this OmniPass  
cursor in the login prompt area, but do not click the  
[Login] or [Submit] button.  
Click Finish to complete the remember password proce-  
dure. The site location, the credentials to access the site,  
and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are  
now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The  
OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Pass-  
word Site) can always be changed in Vault Management.  
Logging in to a Remembered Site  
Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate  
when you return to a remembered site is determined by  
Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in  
Vault Management.  
Associating a Friendly Name  
After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login  
prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a “friendly  
name” for this site. You should enter something that  
reminds you of the website, the company, or the service  
you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass  
associates this friendly name with this website.  
The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to  
login to: Windows, remembered websites, and all other  
password protected resources.  
With Master Password  
Once you return to a site you have remembered with  
OmniPass, you may be presented with a master pass-  
word prompt. Enter your master password and you will  
be allowed into the site.  
Additional Settings for Remembering a Site  
When OmniPass prompts you to enter a “friendly name”  
you also have the opportunity to set how OmniPass  
authenticates you to this site. There are three effective  
settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site.  
Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device  
When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device,  
the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to  
the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip  
on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously  
logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture  
window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to  
lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to  
log back in as stated above.  
The default setting is Automatically click the “OK” or  
“Submit” button for this password protected site once  
the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time  
you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for  
your master password or fingerprint authentication  
device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass,  
you will automatically be logged into the site.  
Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this  
password protected site when it is activated. Do not  
prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get  
this setting, and each time you navigate to this site  
OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting  
you to authenticate.  
If a machine is locked and OmniPass  
detects a different user logging back in  
with a fingerprint, the first user will be  
logged out and the second user logged in.  
In Windows XP, your login options must be set either for  
classic login, or for fast user switching and logon screen  
to be enabled to use your fingerprint to log on to  
Windows. To change this go to Control Panel, select  
User Accounts and then click Change the way users log  
on or off. If your Windows screensaver is password  
protected, the fingerprint capture window will now  
appear next to screensaver password dialog during  
resume. You can authenticate to your screensaver pass-  
word prompt with your enrolled finger.  
This setting is more convenient in that  
whenever you go to a site remembered  
with this setting, you will bypass any  
authentication procedure and gain instant  
access to the site. But should you leave  
your system unattended with your  
OmniPass user logged in, anyone using  
your system can browse to your password  
protected sites and gain automatic access.  
Password Management  
If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password  
Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master pass-  
word or fingerprint authentication device. Once you  
have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will  
be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to  
click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to  
gain access to the site.  
OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage  
your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the  
OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Manage-  
ment; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you  
gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Pass-  
words under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage  
Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 115 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r  
You can view the credentials stored for any remembered  
website by highlighting the desired resource under Pass-  
word Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values.  
Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you  
can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight  
the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog  
and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm  
the password deletion.  
Choosing User Identity during Login  
To choose your identity during login, type your user-  
name in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that  
the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password:  
field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-  
down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity you  
wish to login as and then click OK to login.  
Switch User Identity  
The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern  
whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or  
directly logs you into the remembered site.  
To switch identities at any time, right-click the  
OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Iden-  
tity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will  
appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK.  
OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a  
website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an  
already remembered site.  
Identities and Password Management  
On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault  
Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there  
is a pull-down selection box labeled, Identity. This field  
lets you choose which identity you are managing pass-  
words for. When you select an identity here, only those  
password protected dialogs that are associated with that  
identity are shown. You can perform all the functions  
explained in “Password Management” on page 114.  
The exception to the above rule is the resetting of your  
Windows password. If your password is reset in  
Windows, then the next time you login to Windows,  
OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt  
you to “Update” or “Reconfirm” your password with  
OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the  
prompt(s) and click OK and your OmniPass "master  
password" will still be your Windows password.  
CONFIGURING OMNIPASS  
This section gives an overview of both the Export/  
Import function and the OmniPass Control Center.  
OmniPass User Identities  
Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple  
accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and  
boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide  
you identities, you would be limited to remembering  
one account per site.  
Exporting and Importing Users  
Using the OmniPass Control Center, you can export and  
import users in and out of OmniPass. The export  
process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and  
any enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All  
OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single  
encrypted database file. During the import process, the  
Windows login of the exported user is required. If the  
proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile  
will not be imported.  
To create and manage identities, double-click the  
OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Manage-  
ment; OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once  
you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage  
Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage  
the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user  
To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click  
Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity  
and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch  
to the new identity and start remembering passwords.  
You should periodically export your user  
profile and store it in a safe place. If  
anything happens to your system, you  
can import your OmniPass profile to a  
new system and have all your remem-  
bered settings and fingerprints instantly.  
To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to  
delete and click [Delete Identity], then click [Apply].  
You don't forget the Windows login  
credentials when exporting. When you  
examine the importation, you are  
prompted for authentication. The  
credentials that will allow a user profile  
to be imported are the Windows login  
credentials of the exported user. They  
are the credentials that had to be  
submitted when the user profile was  
exported. You will need User Name,  
Password, and Domain.  
When you delete an identity, all of its  
associated remembered sites and password  
protected dialogs are lost.  
To set the default identity, highlight the identity you  
want as default and click [Set as Default]; click [Apply]  
to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to  
OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automati-  
cally be logged in to the default identity for that  
OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which  
you are logging in if you login using "master password".  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 116 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
Exporting an OmniPass User Profile  
To export a user, open the OmniPass Control Center,  
and click Import/Export User under Manage Users.  
If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import  
that user to any computer running OmniPass, pro-  
vided that a user with that name is not already  
enrolled in OmniPass.  
Click Exports an OmniPass user profile. OmniPass will  
prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authenti-  
cation, you must name the OmniPass user profile and  
decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you  
should store a copy of it in a safe place.  
If you attempt to import a user profile who has the  
same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the  
OmniPass import function will fail.  
OMNIPASS CONTROL CENTER  
This section will serve to explain functions within the  
OmniPass Control Center that weren’t explained earlier.  
This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass  
data, and it is both encrypted and password protected.  
This user profile does NOT contain any of your  
encrypted data files.  
You can access the OmniPass Control Center any of  
three ways:  
Importing an OmniPass User Profile  
Double-click the golden OmniPass key shaped icon in  
the Windows taskbar (typically in the lower-right cor-  
ner of the desktop)  
You cannot import a user into OmniPass if  
there already is a user with the same name  
enrolled in OmniPass.  
Click the Start button; select the Programs group;  
select the Softex program group; and click the  
OmniPass Control Center selection.  
Open the Windows Control Panel (accessible via Start  
To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass  
Control Center, and click Import/Export User under  
Manage Users. Click Imports a new user into OmniPass  
and then select OmniPass Import/Export File (*.opi)  
and click Next. OmniPass will then prompt you to  
browse for the file you had previously exported (.opi  
file). When you select the .opi file for importation,  
OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The  
credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported  
are the Windows login credentials of the exported user.  
They are the credentials that had to be submitted when  
the user profile was exported. You will need User Name,  
Password, and Domain. If you don’t remember the value  
for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain  
should be your computer name.  
button --> Settings --> Control Panel) and double-  
click the Softex OmniPass icon.  
User Management  
The User Management tab has two major interfaces:  
Add/Remove User and Import/Export User. Import/  
Export User functionality is documented in “Exporting  
and Importing Users” on page 115. Add/Remove User  
functionality is straightforward.  
If you click Adds a new user to OmniPass you will start  
the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. The Enrollment  
Wizard is documented in “User Enrollment” on  
page 112.  
If you click Removes a user from OmniPass, OmniPass  
will prompt you to authenticate. Authenticate with the  
credentials (or enrolled fingerprint) of the user you wish  
to remove. OmniPass will prompt you to confirm user  
removal. Click OK to complete user removal.  
OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully  
imported.  
Things to Know Regarding Import/Export  
Assume you export a local Windows User profile from  
Removing a user will automatically destroy  
all OmniPass data associated with that  
user. All identities and credentials  
OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another  
machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import  
the profile, a Windows user with the same login cre-  
dentials must be created on the machine importing the  
profile.  
associated with the user will be lost.  
If you are sure about removing the user,  
we recommend you export the user  
profile.  
Example: I have a Windows user with the username  
Tom” and the password “Sunshine” on my system. I  
have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered  
passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new sys-  
tem. I export Tom’s OmniPass user profile. I go to my  
new system and using the Control Panel I create a user  
with the username "Tom" and the password "Sun-  
shine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass  
user data to the new system.  
User Settings  
The User Settings tab has four interfaces: Audio Settings,  
Taskbar Tips, and Enrollment. User settings allow users  
to customize OmniPass to suit their individual prefer-  
ences. Under User Settings (Audio Settings and Taskbar  
Tips) you can set how OmniPass notifies the user of  
OmniPass events (e.g., successful login, access denied,  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 117 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r  
etc.). The details of each setting under the Audio  
Settings and Taskbar Tips interfaces are self-explana-  
tory.  
Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass  
If you experience difficulties adding a user with a  
blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust  
your local security settings. First attempt the proce-  
dure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to  
OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try  
the following procedure.  
The Enrollment interface allows you to enroll finger-  
prints. For the procedure to enroll and authentication  
device refer to Chapter 2.3. To enroll additional finger-  
prints, click Enroll Authentication Device, and authen-  
ticate with OmniPass. Select the fingerprint recognition  
device in the Select Authentication Device screen (it  
should already be marked by a green check if you have a  
finger enrolled) and click Next.  
Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools,  
and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies,  
expand Security Options, and double-click  
Accounts: Limit local account use of blank pass-  
words to console login only. This setting should be  
set to Disabled.  
System Settings  
The OmniPass Startup Options interface can be found  
in the System Settings tab. With these options you can  
specify how your OmniPass Logon is tied to your  
Windows Logon.  
Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during  
Windows Logon  
After installing OmniPass on your system, you can  
choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You  
authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or  
an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you  
into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass  
authentication, see a Login Error dialog box.  
The first option, Automatically log on to OmniPass as  
the current user, will do just as it says; during Windows  
login, you will be logged on to OmniPass using your  
Windows login credentials. If the user logging into  
Windows was never enrolled into OmniPass, upon login  
no one will be logged on to OmniPass. This setting is  
appropriate for an office setting or any setting where  
users must enter a username and password to log into a  
computer. This is the default setting.  
This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to  
log you into Windows with the credentials supplied  
(username and password). This could happen for any  
of the following reasons:  
With the second option, Manually log on to OmniPass  
at startup, OmniPass will prompt you to login once you  
have logged on to Windows.  
Your Windows password has changed  
Your Windows account has been disabled  
If you are having difficulties due to the first reason,  
you will need to update OmniPass with your changed  
Windows account password. Click Update Password  
and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm  
your password.  
With the third option, Do not log on to OmniPass at  
startup, OmniPass will not prompt for a user to be  
logged on.  
You can manually log on to OmniPass by right-clicking  
the OmniPass taskbar icon and clicking Log in User  
from the right-click menu.  
Enter the new password to your Windows user  
account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is  
unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user  
account password changing.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You  
must first create the Windows user, and you will need  
administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows  
user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using  
the same username and password  
Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass  
If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user  
to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local secu-  
rity settings. You can do this by going to Start,  
Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local  
Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand  
Security Options, and double-click Network Access:  
Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The  
correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authen-  
ticate as Themselves.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 118 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 119 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
I n d e x  
Index  
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Conventions Used in the Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
A
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
AC  
adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
plug adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Anti-theft lock slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Application Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Auto/Airline Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Automatically Downloading Driver Updates . . . . . . 69  
D
DC Power Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 27  
Device Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 80  
Disk  
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
B
Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 28  
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
charging indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
cold-swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
conserving power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
dead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
increasing life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
level indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
lithium ion battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
shorted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
suspend mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Display Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Docking Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Dolby Headphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Double-Clicking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Drivers and Application Restore CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
DVD drive  
tray release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 67  
DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
BIOS  
guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
DVD-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
E
Bluetooth  
Where to Find Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Emergency tray release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
ExpressCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Built-in Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
External Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
C
CapsLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
External Monitor Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 54  
CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
F
Click Me! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Clicking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Cold-swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 41  
Configuration Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 79  
FDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Fingerprint Sensor Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
enrolling a fingerprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
installing OmniPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 120 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
logging into a remembered site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
OmniPass authentication toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
password replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
remembering a password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
uninstalling OmniPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
user enrollment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
using OmniPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
K
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 14  
cursor keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
numeric keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
windows keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
Flexible Bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 19  
cold-swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
eject lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
L
LAN (RJ-45) Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
LifeBook Security Application Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
deactivating and activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
launching applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
uninstalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Floppy Disk  
ejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
write protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Fujitsu Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Fujitsu Driver Update utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
M
Media Player  
Fujitsu LifeBook  
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 39  
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 38  
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
traveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Function Key  
F10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
F7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
F8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 18  
F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 18  
FN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Memory  
capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 45  
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
upgrade module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Memory Stick  
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
H
Hard Disk Drive  
Memory Stick/SD/xD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 48  
Microphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
access indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Hard Disk Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 49, 54  
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Modem Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Modem Result Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Hibernation Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
disable/enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Modular Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
I
Infrared Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 53  
Inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Internal LAN Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
IrDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Mouse problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Multi-Format DVD Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 121 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
I n d e x  
N
R
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31  
Removing a Memory Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
RJ-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
RJ-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
NumLk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
O
Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
access indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
S
ScrLk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
SD Card  
P
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
SD Card/Memory Stick Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
SDRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 45  
Security Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Security Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
PC Card  
access indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
eject button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
installing/removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 61  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Chipset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Pointing Device  
See Touchpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Port Replicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
back panel components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
detaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Status Indicator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 12  
Stereo Line-in Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Stereo Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Suspend Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Power  
AC adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Auto/Airline adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 63  
sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
T
Touchpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 16  
buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
pointing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33  
Power On Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 66  
Power/Suspend/Resume Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6, 32  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Pre-Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Adobe Acrobat Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Fujitsu HotKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
LifeBook Application Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Norton AntiVirus 2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Quicken New User Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
U
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
USB 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 10, 53, 60  
problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
PS/2 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 122 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
L i f e B o o k S 7 1 0 0 N o t e b o o k  
V
Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
W
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Windows  
Windows XP Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Windows XP Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Windows keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Application key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Start keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Wireless LAN  
before using the wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
IP address information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Wireless LAN Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
X
xD Card  
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 123 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 124 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 125 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S7110.book Page 126 Monday, March 20, 2006 1:56 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

EVGA Computer Drive 100 U2 UV19 User Manual
Fisher Paykel Oven AeroTech User Manual
Fisher Price Motorized Toy Car 76921 User Manual
Fisher Price Video Games T6356 User Manual
Fostex Printer VF 08 User Manual
Frigidaire Microwave Oven FPMC2785K F User Manual
GE Answering Machine 29861 User Manual
GE Heat Pump AZ39H09EAC User Manual
Gianni Industries Door 10003M User Manual
Glen Dimplex Home Appliances Ltd Refrigerator BE815 User Manual